








V* 






Q» ^ 

i ' ‘ " V^c « ' ' ‘ . ’% ' “ ” 

® : '^o o'* r K 


^ °^. * 

,,., ^.-1. ‘ono’ 


oo 




o' .0 


^ ^ 

<r ^ 


V ' *' c 


•'j' ,<'^ 








c. ^ 

^ ^ ■; 

■' 0 <1 X ,6 J 4 

o. .a'5' cO^ i ■<» *•' 






0 


0 c <<> ' ‘ 






iy> V 

o 0^ 


.0 




s * ' ^ ’^OhO^ \V '^o,\*^ w 

^ Y * 0 ^ jr>J ^ V^ ^ ^ ^ ' O^ s, s ^ ^ 

/\^ ^ V, 

* ^V ^ Am ^ y.'A <fc* 

" </^ «< V 


r .(S 




y|\ %/ . 


^ O * s \ 


^ ^ C ^ oV 

-^.0, 'f, 

a ^ ' * .? ^ 0^ C ® ^ ^ 

A' . J^d // '' 1 : 2 ^ ^ < .XVXWYv’^ wT 

^ •; '"oo^ 

§-= .1 ' 

^ ^V1 vvvc^^ > \ V ^ 

O . ^ ^ 




\ 


0 O. 


0 


V' A^' 

l/> .< V 


x'^ k 

-V 'o \> ^ ^ 

. ^ .vX"^* ^ 

A V fts 


^ o\‘' 

O . 0 N 0 ' t> ft s ,v\ 




tv * 


^ " 






P S il V- ^ 




\ * 0 


^ 9 \ \^ 


ft o ‘ 

0 K 0 ^ 




- V 

^ ,3^ 'Ap .^ o 


\ 


v" 




\Si^ * s 

C^ ft ^5 -A a V - ^ «JtfB«*^ V 

V'^'W 

fJ'W' '' 

"o o'' ? '. . 


r Iwf' 

•=^0, 


o. 


*7^1 >- 


0 o. ‘ 


^o<§‘ 


k\j 




.' N'*'' '■^i * 

*as0>‘ y i 

^ V ^ ov ^ ^\ ^Vfto^ 

ft .<?•, A, ^ 

7 ^ ^ 


i 

• • ,X^ 


0 « X 



o aV <a 





\/' A^’ 

^ 1^0 e 


'X'^ -* 

v/ «> 







^ 'K,' 


•"bo^ 

■" -x -t, ^ 

® ■'cf' J. 

1 ^tP ,^v 






- aV 

AV ^-v ^ 


- -^ 0 ^ : 4 ., 

r \V ^ 




V 

" ^^^^“ ° ¥: 
*y .> .> K/ 


vA 

v>'^.'*”. b> *"'” 

A. 


V- ,^' 

-A. 


V ' d^ ^ ^ ^ o >' - ^ V ^ 

' * . A ■•^'^ ' ' AL' ■» ■•°’ -‘ — * ^ .-i>V V ' 

A 

✓» 

o^ ^ 


. -o G®* 

*; -tG >- ^ 

V' ■» <i- 

’ #' 'A ‘ » . 

^ ^ .A 


\ B ^ 



0 4 ^ A 


; * :\ “ • ■' » 

^ : '^o o'* : « 

: 4 ^ ,- 

^ ' n*!- 't'. ^ 

ri^ ^ 

V ^ ‘ ° A A A^ s "2 

® ^ M ^1 ^*V 




- .. 0 ^ 0 ?>' 

C*. V ^ '• * « / 

r j 2 




. 0 °<. 




^ % 
^ -O- 




4 , 


' A\ , - ;%; " • ^ \/ , 0 H ' .’. ' '/ , 

l\ M^I\I//X^ ->* \ UlSfe. ■/- v^ 

•< ^ 0 ' ® ^ > 

'» 1 ■* 

“ -/-/////(I'sr 'v 

‘‘ 0 

,A ^ 

% <V 


^ vO o 

\ Y<* 


Q 


O 


o 


<c„ » 


*■: 

*» C. X' ■" V^ 

. %. '. r 

<lV ' > 


*C ' 









’kW-»i: I 

Lm^^ »• 'i ’^'vuHh *'''' w Ji * ’f » ’ ' ■'/ 

S!*t' «)(.f :.\l'?S A,;,-v'^^ ,r’^:\\ 


s. 



J. • tw 4 ’^ 

' J*» K * ' * * • 

w*N'XV ; 


4 ■ I 


; ""C • '■“i'f 


:'''''"W-" ■ . 




iv -^-^'4 


-i;:. / f 






•1 V r ly * 

Xv •'.V-«-- .•' .‘t.v-" >y 5 

■•alMBifVi' ,.‘r* I. • 







Wiia . 


f i»f 

'■-*■ ' i^J/. 





.' n< - 






IV 1^ ^ ',/. i * : * ^ ■'■’ 





THE FOUR CORNERS AT COLLEGE 









‘i" 






T>‘H? 

Jb » *♦ ^ > 

J^f-k • •'; - , , ; 



* -Vi 


'■SC 


>':t4 . 





* -j' Vj 

A ^ -> 

• * 

. -^j4. -L f 

1 €y V ] 

‘‘ .V 


-Y'* ■ 


./*> 

- .-J 


, ■• f . ^ ^ • ••?'' 

^ :. ^ rrnMTVrTi* nTi~n'i%rr ik^< 


. * . • «)U'SH0Ur 1 -■ • * • •! ^i. * fc Sjt, , 

s' ^ 3# -%u* ■ j * ’^V: - ■ - ■ r* rj 

pl^-i-:^ -.WZ- >y^M !■ J 





V 


• ■* ^ ^ i-' 


^■w** 


- ► "* M iA a 


> ;:, 




' ■ '■’■c i 

■rfc'-v**' ■ 
■*"■•' - w 





^ '. '-^Ja 

# 


u *■ . ‘5r^ ■-■• TTs gaaf 

■ to- 




« 


. ClM -^S 

. - . , ^y.*’j:r^a^i:;yjkL4ui: V r 

m- ' 

■ . a:; - ■ ■ ■ 

* ■' V -» ■. ' • i • - X*J' ' 

:i _'• r * j. - • • >* i -.‘i 





&:j - " ->7 -. - • ■‘^V'^k^ \ ■ ■ ■■ ™ 

' y "-.A -f ■ t.'* .''r * .''-'■'''.»,-v - . . • ‘il;'’' -' 

^ ' ■ .■fr'^- ' ^ - •>■■ •'' ■' ■ Tf-"’ r- ^-f ■■ •'5?''v' •'^ W 1 . ' V .IK 


•■ -r .»i 


-;^' .:fy 





• • »-, 

A'* -j* 

•>?« '-'-..s. .--■ 








“ I’m in a Club” 









THE FOUR 
CORNERS 
AT COLLEGE 


By 

AMYE.BLANCHARD 

!l 


Qeor^W Jacobs ^Company 
Philadelphia^ 




Copyright, 1911, by 
George W. Jacobs & Company 
Published September, iqij 




All rights reser^fed 
Prhited i)i U. S, A. 


©CI.A295933 

il 


CONTENTS 


1. 

Full-fledged Freshmen 



. II 

II. 

An Out-door Breakfast 



. 27 

III. 

Jack is too Ambitious . 



• 43 

IV. 

Shut in 



* 59 

V. 

A Set of Furs .... 



• 77 

VI. 

A House Party . . . 



• 95 

VII. 

May Day 



• 115 

VIII. 

Sophomores .... 



‘ 131 

IX. 

The Turning of the Worm 



. 149 

X. 

Yale Prom 



. 165 

XL 

A Country Ride . 



. 181 

XII. 

Nan Writes a Play . 



. 199 

XIII. 

An Ice Carnival . 



• 215 

XIV. 

A Studio Reception . 



. 231 

XV. 

A Secret Rite .... 



. 249 

XVI. 

Jo AND Her Prizes . 



. 265 

XVII. 

Down Home .... 



. 285 

XVIII. 

In a Snow Storm . 



• 303 

XIX. 

A Final Race .... 



. 321 

XX. 

Beginning and End . 



• 339 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


“ I’m in a club ! ” Frontispiece 

Jo wore her furs triumphantly . . . Facing page 86 

At the Yale Prom " “ i68 

The Start “ ‘‘ 224 ^ 

They made much of the little bride . . “ “ 296 


t 



■t 


. , 1 • 
I : . 


I , 



t 


> 




V 

t , 

• 


. < ' 
'l 


^ s 


I • 


/ ' ’ 


*> 


4 


I 


I 

* r 


I . 







CHAPTER I 


FULL-FLEDGED FRESHMEN 

Five girls and two older women were sitting 
at a table in the charming inn of one of New 
England’s pretty college towns. They were all 
talking at once, or at least the girls were, but 
presently one of the ladies rapped on the table 
with the handle of her knife. “ Attention! ” she 
cried. I don’t see how they can keep it up 
without so much as taking breath, do you, 
Mary ? ” She turned to the lady at her side. 
‘‘ Did you ever hear such chatterboxes ? ” 

“ I have heard these same ones on similar oc- 
casions,” answered Mrs. Corner. 

Oh, but we haven’t seen each other for so 
long,” began one of the younger girls. 

“ But you don’t see with your mouth, Jack, 
dear,” responded her Aunt Helen. “If it is a 
question of merely seeing, you may look as long 
as you like.” 

“ What were you going to say. Aunt Helen ? ” 
asked the eldest of the girls. 

“ I was going to suggest that we try to finish 
this meal some time before night. Your mother 


12 The Four Corners at College 

is tired and it is long past the hour when she 
usually takes her rest. Of course, I know you 
all want to hear what Nan and I did over there 
in England last summer, and we want to know 
all about your doings with Aunt Sarah, but I 
really think some of it will keep for another day.’' 

Thus adjured, the girls gave their attention to 
their luncheon, though it was hard to repress 
Jack, who was just at the loquacious age. She 
and her twin, Jean, were in a constant state of 
giggles; the smallest pretext being sufficient to 
start a titter. It seemed difficult for them 
to subside even when their mother threatened to 
carry them off before they had finished their des- 
sert, which they had just begun to take. 

But at last the meal was over and they all filed 
out of the dining-room, and into the reception 
room, where the chattering recommenced with, 
‘‘ Oh, mother, what are we going to do next ? ” 
“ Aunt Helen, don’t you think Jo ought to be in 
the same house with us?” ‘‘ Mother, Jack says 
she is going to get ahead of me and enter college 
first. Do you think that is fair?” This last 
from Jean, who had never learned not to 
take Jack seriously. ‘‘ Besides,” Jean went on, 

Mary Lee has caught up with Nan, and I reckon 
I can catch up with you just as easily.” 

‘‘ No, she didn’t catch up to Nan,” retorted 
Jack. Nan was ill. She really was a year 


Full-Fledged Freshmen 13 

ahead, but she couldn’t stay so because she had 
that old pneumonia and had to stop. She was 
really a whole month in college ahead of 
any of us.” She slipped her hand into her 
sister’s by whose side she sat. ‘‘ Of course, Nan, 
I am awfully sorry you were ill, but I can’t 
help being glad that you’ll be here instead of in 
New York, because now we shall all be together 
for four years.” 

‘‘ Yes, there are compensations,” admitted 
Nan. I never could have stood it to go back 
to Barnard and begin all over again a year be- 
hind my class. It is nice for us all to be here.” 

“ By the same token,” spoke up Jo Keyes, 
“ I’m rather glad I didn’t fairly enter with you. 
It all seems to have happened luckily. If I 
hadn’t been offered that position to teach last 
year, and if Aunt Kit hadn’t had the influence to 
get me this scholarship, I should be pegging away 
in New York myself.” 

‘‘ Hurrah for the scholarship ! ” cried Jack. 

“It is the scholarship that really settled the 
question for us,” Mary Lee declared, “ for when 
Nan decided that she could not and would not go 
back to Barnard we felt around in our minds 
for an inducement which should settle matters 
for the rest of us, and you, Jo, were the induce- 
ment.” 

Jo arose and made a low curtsy. “ Thanky 


114 The Four Corners at College 

kindly, miss, I appreciate the compliment. Well, 
it’s all a piece of good luck for me, and I am 
as pleased as a mule with side-pockets. I don’t 
want to break up this pleasant company, girls, 
but I really think if we are going to take those 
rooms we saw this morning, we’d better se- 
cure them before it is too late. Then we can 
have our trunks taken over to the rooms and 
get them unpacked before we do anything else. 
Mine is not an elephant, but it contains my ward- 
robe for the blessed year, and I must fain be 
careful of it. Did you get many things when 
you were in England, Nan? ” 

Not many. We couldn’t waste time in shop- 
ping when there were so many pleasanter things 
to do, and then there were the customs to con- 
sider.” 

“ We missed you like anything, if you did have 
a good time,” spoke up Jack, snuggling her cheek 
against Nan’s arm. 

‘‘ But you all had a fine time down home, too,” 
returned Nan. Once or twice I declare, I was 
quite ready to come back, for I got a tiny bit 
homesick when you all wrote about the nice 
homey times you were having.” 

“Were you homesick, too, Aunt Helen?” 
asked Jean. 

“ Not enough to make me encourage Nan to 
give up our delightful trip. I reminded her 


Full-Fledged Freshmen 

there would be many other summers which we 
could spend in Virginia. Well, girls, are you 
ready to secure those rooms? Do you want to 
go, Mary, or has the morning’s business been 
enough for you? I think you’d better go and 
lie down at once.” 

To this Mrs. Corner agreed, but Jack and Jean 
clamored to join the party and were finally al- 
lowed to do so. Jack arguing that they must learn 
the way to the house where their two elder 
sisters were to be. 

The rooms were cheerful and sunny and were 
finally decided upon. There was a large bed- 
room with two beds which Nan and her sister 
could occupy; from this opened a pleasant sitting- 
room, and across the hallway was a smaller 
room which suited Jo as to price and location. 
In consideration of its being taken with the others 
a reduction was made in the price by which the 
Corners declared Jo must profit. 

“ You can use our sitting-room, of course, Jo,” 
Nan told her, “ and we’ll have a joyous old time. 
Pretty good diggings I think, and much better 
than we decided upon last year.” 

‘‘We were lucky to get a tenant for those,” 
remarked Jo. “ Yes, altogether I like this place 
much better. We must get in our stuff at once, 
and we’ll feel at home in no time.” 

“Are you sorry you can’t be inside the col- 


i6 The Four Corners at College 

lege yard this year ? ’’ asked Jean. ‘‘ It is so 
pretty there.” 

‘‘ I don't mind not being there ; it gives variety 
to one's experience,” said Mary Lee, “ and it will 
add that much more dignity to our sophomore 
year. We poor Freshies can't have everything. 
Shall we say we'll come to-morrow. Aunt Helen, 
and that our trunks and things will come up this 
evening? ” 

‘‘ Yes, for we want to see you all settled before 
we leave. The kiddies are to enter school to- 
morrow, you know.” 

‘‘ Oh, dear,” sighed Jack; ‘‘ it will be the very 
first time I have not had Nan right there with 
me. I don't know what I shall do when I get 
into a scrape.” 

“ But I shall not be far away,” Nan told her, 
‘‘ besides, you are too old. Jack, to need anyone 
to pull you out of scrapes. You must learn self- 
reliance and have wit enough not to get into 
trouble.” 

“ That’s all very well,” responded Jack rue- 
fully, ‘^but I never expect to get in; it's only 
that the first thing I know I’m there.” This so 
exactly stated the situation that everyone laughed. 

Walking through the shady streets of the 
pretty town they finally returned to the inn which 
held more than one relative of the assem- 
bling girls making ready to enter school or col- 


Full-Fledged Freshmen 17 

lege. The four Corners looked interestedly at 
these various possible college mates, who, in 
turn, gave more than a passing glance at the 
party of lively girls who seemed to be enjoying 
themselves immensely. 

“ Think what a mope I should be here by my- 
self,’’ remarked Jo. “ Isn’t it the jolliest ever 
to think that we are to be together again? Poor 
old Charlie was really cut up when you and I 
failed her last year. Nan, but I suppose by now 
the glory of being a Sophomore more than com- 
pensates. It’s kind of funny for us to be full- 
fledged Freshmen two years running.” 

Full-fledged Freshmen is delightfully allitera- 
tive,” remarked Nan. ‘‘ Tell us something about 
Daniella, Jo. You saw her last week. How was 
she looking? ” 

‘‘ Prettier than ever, and improved in every 
way. Miss Barnes is really mighty kind to her. 
By the way. Miss Barnes was really shocked at 
the idea of the twinnies coming to any New 
England school but hers. I explained that they 
must be under the sisterly eyes of you and Mary 
Lee, and were to change schools no more till 
college was open to them, though I think she 
was only half satisfied. Daniella expects to go 
abroad again next summer with Miss Barnes’ 
party. Of course she will not aspire to going 
through college, but all the same she will show 


i8 The Four Corners at College 

up as well as any of us when she has finished 
school. Girls, we must have a reunion at Christ- 
mas time. If your mother and Miss Helen go 
to Florida there is no reason why the whole 
shooting-match shouldn’t unite in a Christmas 
jollification. Promise me you will stand by the 
crowd and won’t go kiting off to Washington or 
some other seaport. I speak for you first. I 
hope you have not made any plans yet.” 

“ Not a plan,” replied Nan. ‘‘ Our planning 
has taken us no further than just where we are 
now. Aunt Helen and I planned to get safely 
home from England, to meet the family, to settle 
ourselves here at Bettersley and then what might 
come next was to be met. What is it, Aunt 
Helen ? ” she turned to ask as this little lady 
came toward her. 

“ Your mother proposes a drive. Which of 
you will go with her? There is room for two of 
you.” 

‘‘ Oh, I will,” returned Nan promptly, “ and 
we’ll take Jack, unless you want to go. Aunt 
Helen.” 

No, I think you and I need the pleasing 
variety of some other society than one another’s 
after a whole summer together. The rest of us 
will go for a walk; there are things I want to 
say to Jo.” 

So, off they set, Nan glad to have her mother 


Full-Fledged Freshmen 19 

to herself, while Jack was pleased to be seated 
near the driver who afforded her the opportunity 
of making another acquaintance. 

The next day saw Mrs. Corner and Miss Helen 
departing for Boston, the twins beginning life at 
the Preparatory School, and the older girls 
busying themselves in making their new quarters 
as attractive and homelike as possible. There 
were two others of the Freshman class in the 
house, and with these Jo was not long in striking 
up an acquaintance. They proved to be from 
New Jersey. Jo pronounced them promising, and 
announced that she had invited them to have a 
chafing-dish breakfast the next morning which 
would be Sunday. The Corners, who were 
nothing if not hospitable, approved of the plan, 
but set it aside to be considered later as they 
were deep in the arranging of books and pic- 
tures. 

“ The only way to do,” said Nan, who, in 
dressing-sacque and short petticoat, sat on the 
floor hugging her knees while she viewed the 
room’s possibilities, ‘‘ is for each of us to take a 
wall, each to take a shelf for her books, then one 
can take one end of the mantel, the second can 
take the other and the third can have the middle. 
We can toss up for them, or draw lots or some- 
thing.” 

“If by the third you mean me,” spoke up 


20 The Four Corners at College 

Jo, “I am not going to impose myself upon you 
in that way. It is your sitting-room, not mine.’’ 

“ I like that,” returned Mary Lee, ‘‘ when we 
invited you to share it with us.” 

“ Oh, well, I don’t mind going so far as to 
accept a certain use of it, but I am not going to 
encroach upon wall space and bookshelves, that 
is certain. Goodness knows I don’t have such a 
power of stuff as to need to spill over into your 
domain. When I acquire more than I have room 
for in my own diggings, it will be time enough to 
talk.” 

“ Very well,” returned Nan. ‘‘ When we see 
you wandering around with a Tanagra figure in 
your hand and a lost expression, we’ll not forget 
what you have just said. Mary Lee, we’ll toss 
up for the wall ; the one opposite the windows is 
the biggest, and the fireplace one the smallest, so 
they can go together and be first choice. Who 
has a penny? Heads or tails, Mary Lee?” she 
asked as Jo tossed her a coin from her purse. 

“ Heads,” responded Mary Lee, carefully un- 
rolling a candlestick from its wrappings. 

“ All right. Best two out of three,” and Nan 
flipped the penny in the air. It fell heads up on 
the carpet. “ Heads, one,” cried Nan. The sec- 
ond trial reported “ Tails, one,” but the third was 
heads again and Mary Lee won, to her satisfac- 
tion. 


Full-Fledged Freshmen 21 

You can have the best wall in the bedroom/’ 
she told her sister. 

“ And what about the bookshelves ? ” asked 
Nan. 

“ Oh, you are taller so you’d better take the 
top ones ; I don’t mind.” 

“ Thanks,” responded Nan. “ You can have 
the top ones in the other room and then we shall 
be all fair and square. I’ll get my books out of 
the way at once,” and she gathered a pile of them 
from the floor into her arms. 

‘‘ When’s the piano coming? ” inquired Jo. 

They promised it for Monday. I’ll have to 
get some sort of music rack for my music; 
meantime I can stack it upon one of the chairs. 
Hurrah ! Mary Lee, I’m glad you brought 
that.” The that ” was a University of Vir- 
ginia banner which Mary Lee was shaking out. 

Put it over the mantel ; it will be the best 
place for it. We shall have to get some plants 
for the windows after a while. Let me see, 
where is my second volume of Tennyson? 
Dear, oh me, but it is wearisome work. I won- 
der how the kiddies are getting along; I must 
go over and see after a while. I suppose they 
are squabbling, or else Jack has her things all 
over the place, while Jean is methodically work- 
ing away at her bureau drawers. I suppose I 
ought to help them.” 


22 


The Four Corners at College 

Don’t you do anything of the kind,” put in 
Mary Lee. ‘‘ They will never learn self-reli- 
ance if you tag them all their lives. That is 
just like you, Nan; you’d wear yourself out over 
here, and then go over to them and do the same 
thing. I should think it was over-taxing your 
strength that brought you low after your illness 
last year.” 

“ Oh, yes, I know, I know,” returned Nan 
hastily. “ Don’t remind me of it every five min- 
utes or I shall never get any fun out of any- 
thing.” 

“ Do let me help you, Nan,” said Jo, throwing 
off her hat. ‘‘ I should love to.” 

How about your own room ? ” 

Oh, that will adjust itself as time goes on. 
I don’t know where I want to put things yet. 
I like a gradual growth rather than a sudden 
blossoming.” 

Mary Lee laughed. In place of Jo’s bump of 
order was a dimple, the girls were wont to de- 
clare. Nan had trained herself into a fairly 
orderly person, while Mary Lee was the very 
pink of orderliness and method. ‘‘If you will 
help,” remarked the latter as Jo began gather- 
ing up books indiscriminately, “ do put on an 
apron. There are two or three in the lower 
drawer of my bureau. Help yourself; you will 
ruin your clothes if you work without one.” 


Full-Fledged Freshmen 23 

Jo meekly obeyed orders, and enveloped in a 
blue and white checked apron she set to work 
and soon Nan had filled her shelves, then, with 
Jo’s help and by dint of a step-ladder the pic- 
tures were hung, a large poster of the Wagner 
Festival at Munich occupying the place of honor 
on Nan’s longest wall. Mary Lee tacked up 
one of her trophies from Munich on the door 
which was assigned her, the poster representing 
a snow scene, figures skiing and rodeling being 
conspicuous upon it. 

It begins to look like something,” said Nan 
viewing the room with pleased eyes. “ Mrs. 
Thayer said we could store what we didn’t want 
to use, up in her attic. Would you mind seeing 
if the man can come and get out these boxes, 
Jo?” 

Mary Lee began to gather up bits of paper and 
such stuff as littered the floor. “ You’d better 
go lie down. Nan; you are all worn out,” she 
advised, looking at her sister critically. 

Nan looked at her grimy hands. “ I shall 
have to wash my hands, though I confess I don’t 
want to move even for that. I am tired.” 

Of course you are. Just flop down for a 
few minutes and never mind your hands.” 

Nan accepted the suggestion with a sigh of 
relief, Mary Lee stuffed pillows behind her 
back and threw a gay Italian blanket over her 


24 The Four Corners at College 

feet. She was lying there holding up her hands 
lest they come in contact with any part of her 
clothing when the twins came in to report upon 
their day’s doings at Rayner Hall. Jean had 
unpacked and put away all her belongings; Jack 
had only partially done so, but she had scraped 
acquaintance with most of her classmates and had 
much to tell of this and that one. She insisted 
upon washing Nan’s face and hands for her, 
slopping the water down Nan’s neck till she 
squealed, and vigorously rubbing her face with a 
towel till it glowed. Having performed these 
ministrations she was ready to go, and the two 
departed, leaving their sisters better satisfied as 
to their ability to look after themselves. 


m 




CHAPTER II 


AN OUT-DOOR BREAKFAST 

Madge Wright and Emily Taylor were 
quite ready to accept Jo’s suggestion of a 
chafing-dish breakfast out of doors, therefore 
the five girls gathered together their parapher- 
nalia on Sunday morning, and betook them- 
selves to the nearest woods. With fruit, eggs, 
rolls and butter they considered themselves 
well supplied. Nan was proud of a small cof- 
fee-pot from Paris which she declared would 
make the best coffee ever tasted. Each girl 
provided her own cup and saucer, spoon, knife 
and fork. Mary Lee saw to it that a supply 
of paper napkins was not wanting, and tucked 
in some paper plates with various other odds 
and ends which her housewifely mind sug- 
gested. 

They found that they were by no means the 
only ones who were enjoying an al fresco meal, 
for various little groups were seen coming, 
going, or already established in the beautiful 
woods bordering the lake. Jo had been well 
informed when she was told that it was quite 


28 The Four Corners at College 

the thing for the students of Bettersley to take 
breakfast out of doors in suitable weather. 

‘‘Have you a boat, Madge?” asked Nan. 
The girls had decided in the beginning to do 
away with a formal manner of address. 

“ No, I haven’t yet, though perhaps I shall 
later. There are so many things to think of 
at first, that I don’t see how I can afford it this 
year. Emily and I think we’d better wait till 
next year when perhaps we can get one cheaper 
from some out-going Senior.” 

“ I think I shall try to have one,” rejoined 
Nan. “ My Aunt Helen gave me some money 
to spend on what I most want, and I think per- 
haps a boat will be the most useful thing, for 
then we all can enjoy it, even the kiddies.” 

“ Your little sisters, do you mean ? ” 

“ Yes. They are going to Rayner Hall, you 
know.” 

“ Then there are four of you Corners here? ” 

“ Yes, we are a quadrangle at present, though 
before mother and Aunt Helen left us we were 
a hexagon. That is our favorite joke and it 
has to be aired sooner or later, so you all may 
as well get it in the early stage of our acquaint- 
ance. Do you know much about the college, 
or have you arrived in the condition of a dis- 
coverer ? ” 

“ Not exactly. I have a cousin who is a 


An Out-Door Breakfast 


29 


Junior, and she has told me a lot of things. 
We are rather depending upon her to keep us 
properly posted. However, she is engaged and 
I don’t suppose she will be quite as useful as 
she might have been otherwise. Lots of the girls 
are engaged, you know.” 

‘‘ None of us are,” responded Nan laughing, 
“ and so far as I can see none of us have the 
least intention of being.” 

‘‘Yet — ” said Madge laconically. 

“ ‘ We know a little what we are, but who 
knows what he may be,’ ” quoted Nan. “ There, 
the others have stopped. Evidently they have 
found a spot which appeals to them.” 

The girls had already laid down their 
burdens by the time the two in the rear had 
come up. “Isn’t this fine?” cried Jo. “We 
were looking for a stone flat enough to set the 
chafing dish on, and here it is, then we have 
a fine view of the lake, and this spot is lovely 
and shady. We will preempt this place for 
every fair Sunday till cold weather. Don’t you 
say so, girls ? ” 

“ It might be better to try a different place 
each time,” remarked Emily Taylor. 

“ Oh, but I say when you see a good thing 
stick to it,” argued Jo, busying herself with un- 
packing the small basket. 

“ Look out,” warned Mary Lee, hurrying to 


30 The Four Corners at College 

her aid. “ Don’t let the eggs roll into the 
lake.” 

“ That would be a catastrophe,” admitted Jo. 
'' Now, ril do the eggs while you make the 
coffee.” 

Oh, no.” Mary Lee would have none of 
this. “ The eggs won’t take a minute. You 
must wait till the coffee is just about done before 
you begin the eggs. Isn’t that just like you, Jo, 
to go rushing pell-mell into a thing before you 
consider? ” 

It’s exactly like me,” confessed Jo, laugh- 
ing good-naturedly. “ All right. Go ahead 
with your coffee, and I will admire the water- 
scape, or spend my time in friendly converse, 
then when the coffee act is over you can give me 
my cue for the eggs to appear.” 

Mary Lee busied herself over her task while 
the others began eating their fruit. Jo tossed 
Mary Lee a pear. “ You might be nibbling at 
that while the water is boiling,” she suggested. 
But Mary Lee was not for such uncertain 
methods and declared she could not enjoy a meal 
which might be interrupted by the boiling over 
of the water. So she carefully waited till the cof- 
fee was an assured matter and then settled to 
her pear, though still with an eye on the cof- 
fee-pot. 

Peaches and pears disposed of, the girls 


An Out-Door Breakfast 31 

waited expectantly for their eggs which Jo es- 
sayed to prepare. She had them done to a 
nicety. Each girl held her plate ready as Jo was 
about to lift the chafing dish from the fire. 
Suddenly a pufif of wind sent the blaze career- 
ing upward toward the handle, and Jo dropped 
the whole thing, to the consternation of the 
others. 

'' Oh, Jo, why didn’t you put out the lamp 
first?” cried Mary Lee in distress. 

Jo lifted the pan and looked ruefully at the 
mass of scrambled eggs which decorated the 
green grass. ‘‘ Why didn’t I ? Because I am 
a first-class idiot, I suppose. Hereafter I re- 
linquish my office of cook. You and Nan can 
do all the cooking from this time on.” 

Nan was examining the yellow mixture. 
“ The top of it would be all right,” she declared, 

if anyone chooses to try half rations.” 

I’ll go back and see if I can get more eggs,” 
avowed Jo. 

“ No, please don’t,” begged the others. “ It 
is too far and we don’t want to wait.” 

But I deserve to do it.” 

No, never mind. We have plenty of rolls, 
and marmalade, and with the coffee that will 
be as much as we ever had in Europe. We are 
breakfasting late and dinner will be early, so I 
think we shall not starve.” So they took the 


32 The Four Corners at College 

top of the eggs, Jo refusing any share at all, 
and munched their rolls contentedly. The cof- 
fee at least escaped disaster and was pronounced 
perfect. 

After clearing up the evidences of their pres- 
ence as well as they could, they returned home to 
make ready for church. 

‘‘How do you like the new acquaintances?” 
Jo asked the two Corners as they were on their 
way to church. 

“ Can’t tell yet,” returned Nan. “ What’s 
your decision, Jo? You generally waste no 
time in coming to conclusions.” 

“ I think Madge is the nicer of the two. 
Emily is what I might term an objector, though 
in my earlier parlance, I should have said a 
kicker. Just what Madge’s special and peculiar 
vice is I haven’t discovered. I suppose we shall 
see more or less of them, though as there are a 
thousand girls, more or less, in the college, we 
shall probably select others for our very own.” 

“If they also select us,” put in Mary Lee, 
wisely. 

“Of course they are bound to do that,” re- 
turned Jo confidently. 

“We shall be making discoveries pretty fast 
from now on,” remarked Nan. “ We don’t 
want to be verdant Freshmen any longer than 
we can help, and oh, we shall be so busy, what 


An Out-Door Breakfast 33 

with lectures and studies and our amusements 
and clubs and sports. We shall be up to our 
eyes pretty soon. I think I shall go in for boat- 
ing, for one thing.” 

** I shall take up basket ball, for we had a lot 
of that at school last year,” decided Mary Lee. 

“ I am divided between golf and field hockey,” 
said Jo. ‘‘ The hockey seems rather more en- 
ergetic, and is one of the very popular sports 
here, so maybe I shall cling to that, though I 
shall not object to taking an oar with you. Nan, 
once in a while.” 

‘‘ I think I must see about a boat to-morrow,” 
Nan decided. ‘‘ Aren’t the society houses 
dears? Which have you set your heart upon, 

Jo?" 

‘‘ Hard to tell ; they are all so attractive. I’ll 
tell you later. Did you know we are supposed 
to take up charity work of some kind? ” 

‘‘ Oh, dear, yes. I heard that long ago, at the 
same time I was told of self-government. If 
we don’t behave ourselves we are brought to 
terms not by the faculty, but by our college 
mates. Pretty good idea, I think,” asserted 
Nan. 

There is a fast set we must avoid,” Mary 
Lee remarked. “ I heard of some of their 
doings last year, though, take it all in all, it is 
a very democratic college. I like the idea of 


34 Four Corners at College 

there being no fixed dues in the societies but that 
everyone gives as she is able, so all are on the 
same footing.” 

That will suit yours truly,” said Jo. Not 
being blessed with greatness of riches, I should 
be shy of rushing in where poverty should fear 
to tread. I will do my little best if perchance it 
happens that I be besought to enter one of the 
societies.” 

There was an afternoon of letter-writing, 
walking, and of visiting the twins at Rayner 
Hall, and the first Sunday at Bettersley was 
over. On Monday Nan’s piano arrived, and she 
began her practicing. She already played very 
well, and whether this report had come to the 
ears of her fellow students, or whether some- 
one passing the house noticed that a more than 
usually good musician dwelt within, did not be- 
come known, but one afternoon two Juniors 
waited upon Miss Nancy Corner with an invita- 
tion to join a musical club. Nan was prompt to 
accept. I have always been wild to play con- 
certed music,” she said, ‘‘ but I have never had 
much chance. Once or twice I have played the 
piano accompaniment to a violin, and my teacher 
in Germany gave me the opportunity of work 
with two pianos. There were four of us who 
did that sort of thing, and it was mighty good 
practice.” 


An Out-Door Breakfast 


35 


“ The first meeting will be on Friday even- 
ing,” the elder of the two girls, Miss Markham, 
told her. ‘‘We shall meet in Chaminade Hall. 
Do you sing. Miss Corner? ” 

“ Not very much,” returned Nan doubtfully. 
“ My voice is, most of it, in my fingers instead 
of in my throat.” 

Miss Markham smiled. “ I wish you would 
let your fingers sing for us now,” she said. 

Nan colored up. She was even yet rather 
timid about playing, and on this occasion felt 
that she would have severe critics, but she an- 
swered simply. “ I’d be glad to play if you care 
to hear me.” She first gave a little dance of 
Chaminade’s, and then the beautiful MacDowell 
Suite. She had memorized both of them and 
played with skillful technique and as only a true 
music lover can. 

Miss Markham was on her feet when Nan 
turned around upon her stool, the light of ardent 
devotion to her music still shining in her face. 
“ You are a discovery,” cried Miss Markham as 
she held out her hands. “ How glad I am that 
we are the first to get hold of you. You play 
charmingly, perfectly charmingly, doesn’t she, 
Alice ? ” She turned to her friend, Alice Bron- 
son. 

“ We are indeed most fortunate in being the 
first to claim you. Miss Corner,” said Miss 


36 The Four Corners at College 

Bronson. “ Thank you so much. We shall all 
have some good times together, I am very sure. 
Do come and have tea with us some afternoon. 
We are in Allerton, Number Seven. Suppose 
you come Thursday and meet the other girls of 
our little club. Lil here is first violinist, I 
am second, and there are several other girls 
who alternate for the violin parts. We have 
quite a number of pianists, but they are never 
all on hand at once. Come over and meet them 
all.” 

Nan saw her guests to the door, then she ran 
to the room where Mary Lee and Jo were 
closeted. Bursting ' in she cried : ‘‘ Fm in a 

club and IVe been invited to take tea with some 
awfully nice girls; Juniors. Isn't it fine?” 

“ You, Nan Corner, to get ahead of us in that 
way,” cried Mary Lee. 

‘‘ Tell us all about it,” Jo made the request. 

Well, they asked for me, as you know, for 
in some way they had heard I aspired to be 
musical, and it seems there is a darling club 
to which they belong, violins, and pianos, and a 
harp, I believe.” 

‘‘ Oh, Nan, really? ” 

“ I have heard so, though they didn't tell 
me. They meet Fridays and they want me to 
come and have tea with them at their rooms on 
Thursday so I can meet the other clubbers. Oh, 


An Out-Door Breakfast 37 

I do feel so grand. They were awfully nice 
about my playing.’' 

“ What are they like ? ” asked Mary Lee. 

‘‘ I thought they were a little stiff at first, but 
they limbered up wonderfully after the music, 
and were most cordial. Miss Markham is very 
striking; she has lots of fluffy red hair, big blue 
eyes and a Mayflower complexion. Miss Bron- 
son is a dark little thing, but looks as if there 
were a lot of go in her.” 

‘‘ Our first introduction to outsiders in the 
upper world,” said Jo. Doesn’t it seem queer 
that some of these girls who are perfect 
strangers to us now will probably become 
near and dear friends within the next four 
years ? ” 

‘‘ I wonder how the kiddies are getting along,” 
said Nan, not paying much attention to Jo’s 
speculations. ‘‘ I think I must go over and see 
about them,” she added. 

‘‘ Don’t you do it,” Mary Lee interfered. 
‘‘ Let them come to you. If they imagine you 
are going to play guardian angel all the time 
they will flop right over on you every time things 
go a little wrong. They will come fast enough 
if they need you.” 

But I really want to know for my own sat- 
isfaction,” said Nan a little wistfully. 

Well, here they come,” announced Jo, so 


38 The Four Corners at College 

you can sit still and let them pour out their 
woes or their joys as the case may be.” 

The twins came in all primed with news of 
their school, of their teachers, the boarding 
pupils and all the rest of it. They liked this 
one; they didn’t like that, but take it all in all 
it wasn’t bad. Had Nan seen about getting a 
boat? Oh, bother, why hadn’t she? Too busy? 
That was just the way it was going to be. Why 
not go now? Why not indeed? So off the 
whole party trudged, and before the sun had set 
they had bargained for the boat, and were on 
their way back to their quarters, all discussing 
the subject of a name for this latest acquisi- 
tion. 

Mary Lee wanted it to be called The Dolores, 
after her beloved friend, Mrs. Kirk. Jack 
clamored for The Witch. Jean begged for 
The Water Ousel in memory of their California 
sojourn. Jo suggested the unusual combination 
of The Namajeja as combining the first two 
letters of all the names of the four Corners. 
Nan herself was non-committal. 

‘‘ I think you might call it The Witch/' in- 
sisted Jack. 

No, she’s got to call it The Water Ousel,” 
declared Jean. 

‘‘ See here. I’d like to know whose boat it is,” 
said Nan. I bought it with my own money, 


An Out-Door Breakfast 


39 

and I should suppose the right of naming it 
came in with the purchase.’^ 

‘‘ Then you might at least tell us what you 
are going to call it/' said Jack in an aggrieved 
tone. 

‘‘ I am not going to name it Witch, Ousel or 
Dolores, I can tell you that much. So far I like 
the name Jo has proposed better than any of 
the others, but even that doesn’t exactly suit 
me. 

“ Well, please to hurry, for we have to get 
back,” begged Jean. 

‘‘ Can’t hurry in such an important matter, 
but I will tell you what I will do; if I decide 
to-night, I will call you up on the ’phone and tell 
you. Go along now, and don’t be late for sup- 
per or you may get a bad mark.” 

“Bah!” exclaimed Jack in disgust. “We 
aren’t kindergarten babies.” But she followed 
Nan’s advice after running back to give this eld- 
est sister a parting hug and kiss. 

Before she went to bed came a call over the 
’phone. “ Is that you. Jack Corner? ” 

“ Yes.” 

“ The boat is named Flosshilde. Good- 
night.” Then the receiver was hung up and 
Jack could learn no more, rattle the hook as she 
would. 





CHAPTER III 


JACK IS TOO AMBITIOUS 

Nan was sitting curled up in a big chair. As 
Jo expressed it, she had “ fallen into a book,” and 
was deaf to all around her. Presently she laid 
down the volume, picked up a pad and pencil, 
scribbled a few words, then sat looking off into 
space. “ What rhymes with shadow ? ” she 
asked Jo after a few moments. 

“ Can’t think of anything but shad roe,” was 
the flippant response. 

“ You’re such a goose,” returned Nan dis- 
gustedly. 

And you’re so sentimental,” laughed Jo. 

“ I am not over sentimental, do you think ? ” 
said Nan a little doubtfully. ‘‘ I think I am 
practical when there is a need for it.” 

“ Anyone is sentimental who spends her time 
scribbling poetry,” declared Jo. 

Now, Jo, do I neglect my other work? Be- 
sides this isn’t exactly scribbling without a pur- 
pose. We are all trying to write a song and 
set it to music. There is to be a prize for the 
one who does the best. The Euterpe club is of- 
fering it, you see.” 


44 The Four Corners at College 

“ Now you’re talking,” exclaimed Jo. ** Let 
me see? If you could use French you could 
say cadeau, but I suppose that wouldn’t do.” 

Nan regarded her paper thoughtfully. ‘‘ I 
think I can change it to shade,” she said finally, 
'' and then it will be easy enough.” She scrib- 
bled in her alteration while Jo worked at some 
notes she was transcribing. 

‘‘ Here comes one of your confreres, or con- 
souers, more properly,” Jo announced. “ I’ll 
skip. I don’t believe I cotton to her very much.” 

“ Why not, and who is it ? ” 

Lillian Markham. She is the kind of girl 
who doesn’t care a rap about you unless you 
call her ‘ Princess ’ or The Queen,’ or some 
such fancy name and make a lot of romantic 
fuss over her. If you send her adoring notes 
and flowers and gifts addressed to The Lady 
Rufiina, she will think you are perfectly lovely. 
If she were starving and you offered her either 
a compliment or a piece of bread and butter 
she’d take the compliment.” 

“ Why, Jo Keyes, I think you are mean to 
talk that way.” 

‘‘ Now, you’re peeved,” cried Jo with glee. 

It’s so, Nan, even if you don’t like me to say 
so,” she added more soberly. Well, I hear 
her hoof upon the hill, so I’ll vamose.” She 
gathered up her books and left Nan to receive 


Jack is Too Ambitious 45 

the girl who had appealed strongly to her im- 
agination as she had to that of a number of 
others. The tall striking-looking girl with her 
milk white skin and her aureole of fluffy red hair 
was much admired, and when she stood with her 
violin tucked under her chin, and her figure 
swaying to the music's rhythm she certainly was 
picturesque enough to elicit the compliments paid 
her. Little dark, gypsy-like Alice Bronson was 
her closest friend, and was an excellent foil. 
Lillian, by the same token, did not object to being 
seen with Nan with whom she had struck up 
quite an intimacy, and whose dark hair, gray 
eyes and less fair skin did not detract from the 
effect of her own appearance. There were 
other red-haired girls at the college, but one might 
note that Lillian was seldom seen walking with 
one unless she had no pretensions to beauty. Lil- 
lian greeted Nan cordially. ‘‘Truly working?" 
she said. “ How are you getting on ? " 

“ Only fairly," was the reply. “ How about 
you, lady fair ? " 

“ Oh, my song is finished." 

“ Can’t you tell me something about it ? " said 
Nan imploringly. 

Miss Markham shook her head. “ That 
would never do. Are you coming to the dance 
to-night. Nan?" 

“ I hadn’t thought of it. Are you going? " 


46 The Four Corners at College 

‘‘ Oh, yes/’ 

‘‘ And what shall you wear ? ” 

Miss Markham laughed. “ Come and see. 
Do you think red-haired girls should wear red? 
Someone says not.’’ 

‘‘ You could with your white skin,” returned 
Nan with enthusiasm; “ Fd like to see you in 
red.” 

“ Well, you have an artistic eye and ought to 
know. I just stopped to make sure you’d be 
on hand. Be sure you don’t miss it. I prom- 
ised I would meet Alice for tea, so I must 
away.” 

She went out, Nan watching her as she dis- 
appeared up the shady street. For her part she 
could not see why Jo should be so critical. Jo 
and Mary Lee had selected their friends, and 
why should not she? Surely Lillian Markham 
was a girl who was sought by many, and who 
did not bestow her favors indiscriminately. 
Mary Lee had joined a basket-ball team, Jo had 
been asked to join a dramatic club, and so all 
were launched upon such recreations as suited 
them. 

While the older girls were thus improving 
each shining hour, the twins were no less in- 
terested in making new friends and in seeking 
entertainment. So far Jack had behaved with 
the utmost decorum, and her elder sisters felt 


Jack is Too Ambitious 47 

that the time had arrived when Jack might be 
expected to do them honor. 

But that same day Nan, entering her sitting- 
room, found Jack ensconced in a rocking-chair 
and looking the picture of woe. “ I thought 
you would never come,” she said mournfully. 

Now, what is it? ” said Nan, scenting trouble. 

Jack looked down shamefacedly, and kicked 
the toe of one dusty tan shoe over the other. 
“ Well, you see,” she began, there are two 
things.” 

‘‘ Out with them. Don’t be modest. I 
wouldn’t be shy.” 

As if I ever were.” 

Nan gave a short laugh. 

Well, you see,” repeated Jack, Nan, don’t 
you think the lake ought to belong to everyone? 
I think it is awfully mean for the college girls 
to claim it as if the Lord had made it especially 
for them.” 

Nan turned her head to hide a smile. 
“ Which is your quarrel with, the lake or the 
college ? What have you been doing to the 
lake? draining it? ” 

No, of course not. I was just rowing 
around in your boat, and after a while some girls 
came up and said, ‘ That’s a queer name your 
boat has ; what does it mean ? ’ and I told them 
it was named after one of the Rhine maidens 


48 The Four Corners at College 

in Wagner’s ‘ Rhingolcl.’ ‘ Are you a Fresh- 
man ? ’ they asked, and I said I wasn’t, and 
they said I was too young to be a Sophomore, 
so what was I? Did I belong over at Rayner 
Hall? Of course I had to say I did, and then 
they told me I would have to go off the lake, 
and that the Hall girls weren’t allowed there. 

^ Whose boat is that ? ’ they asked. I said it 
was my sister’s, and they said, ‘ Well, your sis- 
ter, whoever she is must learn the rules of the 
college better than to allow you to use her boat 
on the lake.’ ” 

“ Humph ! ” exclaimed Nan. ‘‘ Well ? ” 

“ They were Sophs, I think, and they were 
most disagreeable. They watched me till I had 
taken the boat back. They just shooed me off 
as if I were a chicken scratching in the wrong 
garden,” continued Jack disgustedly. 

‘‘ Well, of course,” rejoined Nan, if it is 
against the rules of the college, we shall have 
to abide by what they said. I’m sorry, honey, 
but it can’t be helped.” She was relieved that 
it was nothing worse, but dreaded the next con- 
fession. “ That is number one, is it ? and what 
is the other thing ? ” 

Jack kicked her feet again and smiled a little. 
“ That was another of their stupid old college 
stuck-upednesses. I was coming away when I 
met a kind of oldish gentleman, the thin skinny 


49 


Jack is Too Ambitious 

kind, not fat like Mr. St. Nick. He stopped 
me and asked if that was Bettersley College. 
When I told him it was he asked if I knew any- 
one who could show him around and I said I 
could.” 

‘‘ Goodness!” exclaimed Nan. 

‘‘ Well, I could, for I had been all over it 
twice ; that first day when we came without 
mother and the other time when she came. So 
I took him all over and showed him everything 
they showed us. He was very nice, though he 
asked some questions I couldn’t answer, but I 
told him I had been here only a few weeks, so 
he excused my ignorance and said I was a very 
good guide.” 

“ Why didn’t you call someone else who did 
know ? ” inquired Nan. 

“ Because I liked to do it myself, and I was 
afraid they wouldn’t let me,” Jack answered 
honestly. ‘‘ I got along very nicely, Nan, I 
really did, and he gave me his card, when he 
went, and thanked me.” 

‘‘ Where is the card ? ” 

I’m coming to that. I was standing there 
looking at the card when one of the older per- 
sons, I think she must be an instructor, came 
up. ‘ Who was that gentleman ? ’ she asked sort 
of excitedly, and I handed her the card. She 
read it and screamed out, ‘ Why, my dear child. 


50 The Four Corners at College 

you don’t mean that was the Mr. Wise. Is he 
a friend of yours?’ I told her no, that I had 
never laid eyes on him before. ‘ Did he not ask 
for one of us? You should have called one of 
the professors.’ She was really quite excited, 
Nan. ‘Which is your class?’ she said, ‘and 
where are you living ? ’ I told her I was at 
Rayner Hall, and she acted worse than the girls 
on the lake, for they treated me only like a 
neighbor’s chicken that had strayed in, but she 
acted as if I were a — a mink or a fox or 
something that had come to steal the chickens. 
She fairly ran me out, and said I was disgrace- 
ful. Was I disgraceful. Nan?” 

Nan laughed, though she said, “ You gave her 
great provocation, child, when you robbed her 
of her own prerogative of showing around a dis- 
tinguished stranger.” 

“ Well, she has his card, anyhow.” 

Nan laughed more mirthfully. “ Did you 
ask her for it? ” 

“ No, I didn’t dare to. She talked so much 
and said so much about it all that I thought the 
best thing I could do was to get away as soon 
as I could. Just wait till I get into college my- 
self, and we’ll see if they treat me like an old 
rat.” 

“ Oh, Jack, it wasn’t that bad.” 

“ It was bad enough.” 


Jack is Too Ambitious 51 

“ And aren’t you bad enough? ” said Nan with 
a smile. You know as well as you’re born 
that you had no business assuming that you be- 
longed to the college. It is simply a case of 
your chickens coming home to roost. Keep 
your own side of the fence hereafter, and don’t 
climb in where you have no right.” 

‘‘ And can’t I ever go on the lake? ” 

‘‘ Only when Mary Lee or I take you. How 
are you getting along at school? You certainly 
should be more interested there than in the 
things our way.” 

“ Oh, it does well enough, but I like to be in 
the things you are in. Nan.” 

“ But that can’t always be managed. What 
is Jean doing?” 

‘‘ I left her playing basket ball.” 

“ Why didn’t you do the same, then you 
wouldn’t have gotten into trouble? However, I 
am glad it was no worse, and it was quite right 
for you to come and tell me about it. I will take 
you out in the Flosshilde as often as I can. 
Now run along; I must practice.” 

Jack left reluctantly. She was one of those 
children who prefer to be with older people, 
though she was not averse to having companions 
of her own age when her elders were out of the 
question. Nan watched her little figure disap- 
pear down the street. ‘‘ How tall the child is 


52 The Four Corners at College 

getting/’ she said to herself. “ She will be 
grown up in no time.” 

She practiced for half an hour and then went 
to her room to prepare for the dance which was 
to be held that night in the great barn used for 
such occasions. She chose a pale pink chiffon, 
her thoughts running back to the time when a 
party dress was a much desired object, and so 
difficult to obtain that its appearance partook 
of the nature of a miracle. She sighed a little. 
It all seemed very long ago when the old brown 
house in Virginia was the only home she knew, 
and when the limits of the small town where it 
stood, measured the field of her experiences. 
Much, much had happened in the past six years. 
Would she care to go back there now? to make 
the life of the quiet place the sum total of her 
existence ? wonder, I wonder,” she mur- 
mured as she wound her dark hair in place. 
Mary Lee came in just as she was slipping on 
her frock. ‘‘ Just in time,” cried Nan. '' I 
must be hooked up into this proper pinkness.” 

“ But why the proper pinkness to-night ? 
Isn’t it rather festive array?” 

Have you forgotten the dance ? It begins 
early.” 

Sholy, as Mitty says. Any men, Nan?” 

I fear me nay, though I am informed that 
Alice Bronson is to dine her brother and a chum 


Jack is Too Ambitious 53 

in a few days, Yale men, they are, and it has 
been whispered that I may be one of the party.” 

“ I suppose next year when we are really 
within the gates there will be more doing. As 
mere Freshmen I suppose we must not expect 
too much,” returned Mary Lee. 

Nan gave a little sigh. If it hadn’t been 
for that illness I would have been something 
more than a mere Freshman by now. Why do 
nerves and emotions and things so use up a body, 
I wonder.” 

“If you had been more than a Freshman now 
it would have been at a different place, or if it 
had been here, then you and I would needs be 
at swords’ points, being in different classes. 
That wouldn’t have been nice at all.” 

“ I quite agree with you. Every now and 
then something comes up to show me that after 
all it is better as it is. Am I all right for my 
debut in college society ? ” 

“ You look scrumptious. I always liked you 
in that frock.” 

“ I am to have supper with Lillian, so you and 
Jo can gang your ain gait. Lillian has sent 
me some lovely flowers for to-night and a car- 
riage is to call for me. There it is now. Good- 
by.” 

She threw on a long wrap and sallied forth. 
The girls of her musical club declared that by 


54 The Four Corners at College 

rights she ought to be a Sophmore, and she was 
therefore included in more affairs and accorded 
more privileges than the younger girls, Mary 
Lee and Jo. Upon this occasion Lillian ap- 
peared in a poppy-red frock with touches of 
black velvet, the same binding her bright copper- 
colored hair. Later on, what was Nan’s amuse- 
ment to find that every red-headed girl in 
college had donned a red frock that evening, 
quite naturally and unostentatiously, as if it were 
not a preconceived plan. We are doing it to 
prove that we can wear red,” Lillian confided 
to her. 

“ And vastly becoming it is to one at least,” 
responded Nan, noting how the red brought out 
the milky whiteness of Lillian’s skin, while the 
black against her burnished hair made it seem 
all the more glorious in color, as Lillian was well 
aware. 

The big barn where the dance was to take 
place, had formerly been used in its ordinary 
capacity, but had eventually been transformed 
into a delightful hall for various recreations. 
It was well lighted and heated, and a stage had 
been erected. Music was already in full swing 
when the two girls arrived. 

‘‘ I was afraid I was going to miss my first 
dance, Cleopatra,” said one of the girls to 
Lillian as the two entered. 


55 


Jack is Too Ambitious 

‘‘Are we as late as that?” said Lillian. 
“ You can't have this one, Rena, for it is Miss 
Corner's; you shall have the next,'' and Nan 
was whirled away. 

A little later she was standing with Alice 
Bronson, both of them watching Lillian, who 
never failed of having a partner. “ I knew an 
artist once who would love to make a study of 
Lil in that dress,” said Nan. 

“ Who was he ? ” asked Alice carelessly. 

“ His name was Marcus Wells.” 

“ Why, do you know him? He is my cousin,” 
returned Alice. “ I suppose you have heard that 
he is married.” 

For the breadth of a second there was a little 
clutch at Nan’s heart, but it passed away almost 
as quickly. “ I supposed he would be,” she an- 
swered quietly. “ He was engaged to Miss 
Romaine then, I believe.” 

How long ago was that? ” 

“ Oh, more than a year.” Nan was quite 
self-possessed now, “ It was quite a casual ac- 
quaintance. We were all camping up in Maine, 
and our old friend. Dr. Paul Woods, happened 
to know Mr. Wells who had a studio near by. 
We have entirely lost sight of him since. I 
don't know what brought him to my mind unless 
the fact that he was about the first artist I ever 
met, and certainly Lil is a subject for a picture.” 


1^6 The Four Corners at College 

“ She certainly is, and I am sure Marc would 
enjoy painting her if his wife would let him. 
She is rather jealously disposed, I hear. They 
are in Europe now, you know.” 

“Yes?” There was the quintessence of in- 
difference in Nan’s tones as she went forward 
to meet one of the girls who came to claim her 
for a dance. 

“ You are so nice and tall. Miss Corner, and 
guide so well,” said the newcomer ; “ you needn’t 
think you will be allowed a wallflower’s privilege 
of sitting still.” 

In spite of what she had heard, Nan enjoyed 
her evening, and went home well satisfied with 
her state of mind. “ I wondered how I would 
feel,” she said to herself, “ and now I know I 
don’t care one little bit. How long ago it seems 
— how very long ago.” 

If she had needed anything to assure her of 
her absolute indifference to the dream she had 
once dreamed it was supplied in a letter she 
found on her bureau, a long letter from Aunt 
Sarah Dent, telling of all that was going on in 
the old home, and telling, too of this and that 
friend, so that when Nan went to sleep her last 
thoughts were not of red-clad maidens with 
coppery hair, nor of the artist who had awakened 
her first girlish romance, but of the old, old 
friends who were still stanch and true. 



1 



I • I 





A 


/ 


i 




I 


t 


. . V 


A . 





• \ 

( 

I 

I 


I 


t 


^ r-' ' , ' , ‘ 

' \ 

I . . , . 

t 

'■ , . « 

'' ' ' 

. )' ' 


I 

I 


1 

( 


1 


/ \ 

i 

\ 


i 



CHAPTER IV 


SHUT IN 

As time went on the Freshmen learned many 
things, not only in college but out of it. They 
discovered that there existed a socialistic, or as 
Jo called it, an early Christian attitude which 
the girls held, one toward the belongings of an- 
other. Did Nan have a particularly pretty hat? 
She would come in one day to find that Alice 
or Emily or Lillian had borrowed it to wear to 
Boston, leaving another in its place, to be sure, 
but an old one. Did Mary Lee enjoy the splen- 
dor of a new coat? One of her friends would 
cheerfully take possession of it upon any occa- 
sion that suited. Jo, it may be said, had nothing 
to spare, and was therefore less afflicted by 
borrowers. 

“ We can’t be mean about it when the other 
girls accept the situation,” declared Nan, “ and 
what are friends worth if we can’t help them 
out in an emergency ? ” 

But when it became known that the Corners 
had received a box containing dozens of cakes 
of chocolate ordered by Miss Helen from Bos- 


6o The Four Corners at College 

ton, there seemed a possibility of their receiving 
little benefit of it, for not only did every girl 
with whom they had a speaking acquaintance 
appear, to beg a cake, but perfect strangers 
would apply. 

‘‘We heard that you had a big lot of choco- 
late,” said one maiden when Mary Lee opened 
to her knock, “and I haven’t had a bite of 
breakfast. Would you mind lending me a 
cake?” 

Mary Lee silently, if a little stiffly, profifered 
the cake, and the girl with profuse thanks de- 
parted. 

“ That is a little too much,” said Mary Lee 
to her sister when she went back. “ When per- 
fect strangers come foraging I draw the line. I 
don’t in the least mind sharing with our friends. 
I believe I know what I shall do. Half the 
chocolate is gone already, and we have scarce 
tasted it. It won’t last a week at this rate, and 
there were twelve large cakes. Not a girl who 
has asked for less than a cake.” 

“ What are you going to do? ” 

“ I am going to buy a box of those little bits of 
cakes, and the next person who appears. I’ll 
offer her the box and tell her to take one.” 

“ Oh, Mary Lee, can you do that and not give 
offense? ” 

“ I don’t care a rap if I do give offense. I 


Shut In 


6i 


don’t intend that we shall supply the entire 
college with chocolate. It won’t give a particle 
more offense than has just been given me by that 
girl who was just here.” There was some truth 
in this as Nan acknowledged, and Mary Lee did 
actually carry out her intention at the very first 
opportunity. 

What was all that giggling and scuffling I 
heard over by Jo’s room ? ” asked Nan. 

“ I’m sure I don’t know. I suppose one is 
bound to hear any amount of giggling and 
scuffling in one’s Freshman year. Next year we 
shall probably do better.” 

‘‘ Next year seems rather a far cry just yet. 
I would really like to know if anything is 'hap- 
pening to Jo.” 

“ I will go and see what’s up,” agreed Mary 
Lee. She came back almost directly, and was 
quite excited. “ They have fastened Jo up in 
her room.” 

‘‘ Who?” 

“ Emily and Madge.” 

“What for?” 

“ I couldn’t quite find out whether it was be- 
cause of something she did or because of some- 
thing she wouldn’t do.” 

“ We must go to the rescue,” decided Nan. 

The two girls flew out to encounter Madge 
and Emily in the hall. 


62 The Four Corners at College 

“ See here,” cried Nan, you’ve got to let Jo 
out” 

‘‘ She’s got to say ‘ please ’ before we do,” re- 
plied Madge laughing and standing guard be- 
fore Jo’s door. 

Don’t let’s have a scuffle,” whispered Mary 
Lee. Probably they won’t keep her there 
long.” 

The two sisters returned to their own room, 
but when they came forth some hours later, Jo’s 
door was still barricaded, roped across and 
fastened by a hook on the outside. 

Do you suppose they have forgotten, or that 
they really mean to keep her shut up?” said 
Nan. 

“ Oh, they meant it fast enough,” declared 
Mary Lee who was beginning to work at the 
ropes to unfasten them. 

Nan immediately undid the hook, and then 
they could force the door open wide enough to 
speak to Jo. “ We’ll have you out in a minute,” 
said the rescuers. Did they really mean to 
prevent you from getting any dinner, Jo? ” 

They did indeed, for that was their final 
threat as they went off. Say ‘ please ’ if you 
want any dinner. I would have starved before 
I said it.” 

By this time Mary Lee had loosened the rope 
enough to admit of a free passage and Jo 


Shut In 


63 

squeezed herself out. ‘‘ We’ll all lose our 
dinners if we don’t hurry/' Mary Lee told her, 
and the three hurried off. 

‘‘ I’m going to punish those girls well for this 
trick," declared Jo. 

We’ll help, for they certainly deserve it," 
Mary Lee answered. 

However, on their return from dinner they 
found that the Corners themselves were the next 
punished, for on entering their sitting-room they 
found it stacked. Everything was piled up in 
the middle of the floor, furniture, books, bric- 
a-brac, hats, shoes, clothing. Nan’s music and 
what not. A placard conspicuously fastened up 
read : Thus be it to those who liberate our 

prisoners." 

The girls stood for a minute gazing at the 
disordered room. “ They’ve just got to come 
and put it in order," cried Mary Lee, whose 
orderly spirit was touched in its most vulnerable 
point. 

‘Hf they don’t, it will be the worse for them," 
Jo made the statement savagely. “ Come on, 
girls, and let’s rout them out." 

The house was a double one. Mrs. Thayer 
and her family occupied the first floor; the Cor- 
ners had the two rooms and bath on one side of 
the floor above, Emily Thayer the corresponding 
ones on the other, while Jo had the little hall 


64 The Four Corners at College 

room between, and on the third floor was a small 
suite of rooms occupied by Madge Wright. 

The three girls went in a body to Emily’s 
door to find it locked on the inside. A jeering 
laugh met their invitation to come out, but as 
the three immediately scurried up to Madge’s 
rooms the door below was hastily unlocked, and 
they were pursued but were not overtaken before, 
they had reached Madge’s apartment and had 
safely locked themselves in. 

They will try to fasten us in,” said Mary 
Lee excitedly. We must try to stack what we 
can while they have gone off for ropes and hooks 
and things.” 

Her surmise was quite correct, for they had 
hardly finished overturning and scattering the 
things in the two rooms before they heard the 
other girls coming up the stairs. One after an- 
other the three above took to the banister, and 
before those below, burdened with ropes and 
boards, could realize what was intended, they 
had slid past them and were back in their own 
rooms. As quickly as possible each provided 
herself with a pitcher of water, and flew back 
to open the door and stand guard before it. 
Their assailants stood at bay but made no 
move. 

“ Will you promise to come in and tidy up 
our rooms?” queried Nan. 


Shut In 65 

“ No, we will not/’ The defiant answer came 
back. 

Besiegers and besieged stood their ground for 
nearly an hour before a truce was declared. 
Emily announced that they had a class they did 
not dare to cut, and that they would call it quits. 

‘‘ But it isn’t quits,” cried Mary Lee, “ for 
you had no right to stack our room.” 

‘‘ Just as much as you had to stack ours.” 

You shut Jo up.” 

“ You let her out.” They all laughed, but 
as Emily and Madge said they could not con- 
tinue hostilities, they went off and left the three 
in possession. 

We’ll have at least one place to go,” Jo 
heard the two say as they were going off. “ My 
rooms are in order,” said Emily with satisfac- 
tion. ‘‘Did you lock yours, Madge?” 

Jo came back whispering. “ Girls, wouldn’t 
it be a great stunt if we could get into Emily’s 
rooms and stack them while they are out ? 
They are so complacent about those being in 
order.” 

“ How can we manage it ? ” said Mary Lee. 
“ We wouldn’t dare to break the door down.” 

“ No, but we can try the different keys and 
see if any of them fit.” 

“ Good idea,” exclaimed the other two. They 
hastily gathered together their keys, tried one 


66 The Four Corners at College 

after another, and at last found one which would 
fit the lock, and they entered in triumph to pile up 
everything they could lay their hands on, and 
create, if possible, more confusion than existed 
in their own room. Not only was the sitting- 
room so treated, but the bedroom as well. The 
bed was stripped, knots tied in the sheets, the 
pillow-cases turned inside out, the blankets 
sewed up, and when their work was done they 
viewed it with glee. Then Nan wrote the fol- 
lowing which was pinned up on one of the 
pillows. 

“ He digged a pit, he digged it deep, 

He digged it for his brother, 

His foot it slipped and he fell in 
The pit he’d digged for t’other.” 

Then they carefully locked the door and went 
back, the three pairs of hands soon succeeding in 
forming order out of the chaos which existed in 
the Corners' room. 

It was quite dark when Madge and Emily re- 
turned, and if the perpetrators of the revenge 
did not see the consternation on the faces of the 
two when they unlocked Emily's door, they 
could imagine it and hugged their satisfaction 
to their souls. 

It wasn’t half as mean a thing as I heard 
of two girls doing last year,” said Jo. ‘‘ They 


Shut In 67 

broke into a girl’s room and read her love- 
letters.” 

“ What a horrid, dishonorable, ill-bred thing 
to do,” cried Nan. ** They must have been very 
ignorant, low class persons.” 

Of course, but that made it all the worse.” 

Wasn’t the other girl furious? ” 

“ I should say so, and she cut them dead 
forever after, though nothing could undo the 
act, or ever make her feel comfortable about 
it.” 

‘‘How did she find it out?” asked Mary 
Lee. 

“ The idiots boasted of it, and tried to tease 
her by referring to some of the things they had 
read in the letters.” 

“If anyone dared to tamper with my cor- 
respondence I would let her know pretty clearly 
what I thought of her,” said Nan with flashing 
eyes. It must be a frightfully low-down sort 
of mind which would for one moment conceive 
of doing such a thing. The idea of interfering 
with what is really another’s sacred possessions. 
When it comes to hats and coats that is quite a 
different matter. I think hereafter we’d better 
keep our desks, as well as our doors, locked when 
we go out.” 

“ Dear me,” said Jo, “I leave my letters 
around anywhere. If a girl should want to read 


68 The Four Corners at College 

them she would have to, though I haven’t a love- 
letter to my name.” 

“ One would think Nan had,” remarked Mary 
Lee slyly. 

Nan flushed up though she protested. “ It 
doesn’t make any difference what kind of 'letters 
they are ; I’d hate anyone to read mother’s 
letters, or Aunt Helen’s, and you would, too, 
Mary Lee.” 

“What about the song contest. Nan?” asked 
Jo, suddenly changing the subject. “ Has the 
prize been awarded, and if so to whom and what 
is it?” 

“ The prize hasn’t been awarded yet, but I’m 
pretty sure Lillian Markham will take it. I be- 
lieve it is to be a bound volume of some of 
MacDowell’s music with an autographed photo- 
graph of himself in the front.” 

“ That is a stunning prize, but what makes 
you think Lillian will take it? Aren’t the com- 
positions to go in anonymously ? ” 

“ Ye-es, but — ” 

“But what?” 

“ I rather think most of us will recognize 
Lillian’s song when we hear it.” . 

“ Is that the way you are to decide? by popu- 
lar vote? ” 

“They are to be judged by a committee as 
well as by popular vote. For instance; if a song 


Shut In 


69 

were to be given first choice by the committee 
and also by the assembled audience, you see 
there couldn’t be any doubt of its merits. Then 
again if the author should have written both 
words and music it would count.” 

“ You did that, so you ought to stand a pretty 
good chance. Nan.” 

“ I believe that there will be many better than 
mine, and I don’t expect to stand any chance, 
being only a Freshman.” 

But they won’t know that,” persisted Jo, 
and you have been studying music long enough 
to be quite on a par with the best of them.” 

Perhaps,” said Nan. ‘‘ At all events I shall 
know next Friday night.” 

However, she did not have the least expecta- 
tion of winning the prize. Since Jo’s criticism 
of Lillian, Nan had noticed several little things 
to which she had been blinded before. She had 
noticed that Lillian had given an inkling of the 
character of her song, without exactly seeming 
to, and those girls who wished to stand well 
with her, and who were not ambitious or gifted 
enough to offer compositions of their own, 
would assuredly vote for the song they believed 
to be Lillian’s. Nevertheless it was not without 
excitement and some spark of hope that Nan 
set forth to the musicale on that Friday even- 
ing. 


70 The Four Corners at College 

The songs were not many in number, and the 
prize had been offered as a stimulus to com- 
position, to the few rather than to the many. 
“ We want to see what talent there is in Betters- 
ley,’' said the president of the club. When 
the time comes that we shall need original music 
for the plays or such occasions as may demand 
special songs, we shall know to whom to look. 
Each girl must be ready to acknowledge the au- 
thorship of her own song after the prize has been 
awarded.’’ 

It was an attentive audience and the songs 
followed the rule, as might be expected, of be- 
ing good, bad and indifferent. Nan, critical 
enough, was free to confess to herself that she 
had no reason to be ashamed of the work she 
had sent in. Hers was nearly the last on the 
list, she observed as she looked over her pro- 
gramme. There would be less enthusiasm, per- 
haps, as the evening wore on, but after all it 
would give a better chance for comparison, and 
she waited expectantly as the opening bars were 
played before the singer began. 

To her surprise the verses did not follow her 
text exactly, for the words which she had be- 
lieved to have a certain lilt, and to be best 
adapted to the music, were wanting, and others 
had been substituted more commonplace and less 
musical. Her surprise increased as she discov- 


Shut In 


71 ’ 


ered further that the music had been altered; 
certain harmonies which she had rather prided 
herself upon, were changed to others anything 
but original. The whole thing had dropped to 
commonplaceness. Was it the fault of the 
singer? What was the matter? Whom could 
she accuse? Who would believe her if she did 
accuse anyone? If the music had fallen into the 
hands of an unscrupulous person what proof 
had she that the alterations were not her own, 
or that her claim to a difference might not be 
because of an afterthought? She thought it 
over during the rest of the performance and 
came to the conclusion that there was nothing 
to do but accept the situation. 

She was aroused from her reverie by the stir 
and movement around her and was chagrined to 
hear someone say : ‘‘That number ten was 
almost the best; it just fell short of being really 
fine.” 

Nan set her lips firmly. “ My time will 
come,” she told herself. 

As she had foreseen, the prize went to Lillian 
Markham who, in her most becoming dress, re- 
ceived it gracefully, and acknowledged the ap- 
plause with a gracious smile. Whether it was 
Lillian who had played the trick upon her or 
whether it was some other, Nan had no means 
of finding out. Should she show coolness, and 


72 The Four Corners at College 

Lillian were really innocent, Nan would be 
suspected of jealousy, and yet — and yet — . 

However, after the songs had all been openly 
acknowledged by the various authors, and the 
audience had broken up into little grpups, Nan 
went up to receive back her manuscript from the 
hands of the president who greeted her cordially. 

A little more, Miss Corner, and you would 
have carried off the prize,” she said, ‘‘ and that 
would have been wonderful for a Freshman.” 

‘‘ It isn’t exactly as I thought I sent it in,” 
said Nan. “ My final copy was a little different, 
I am sure,” 

‘‘Why, isn’t that too bad? You must have 
sent in the wrong one, then? That would be 
the only explanation, wouldn’t it?” 

As there was no invitation to submit the one 
Nan knew to be the real copy, she saw that any 
further argument would bring suspicion upon 
herself, so she only answered, “ It seems so.” 

“ You must let me see how you eventually 
worked it out. I shall be interested to look at 
it some time,” Miss Converse went on. 

Nan murmured something about being flat- 
tered at the interest in her work and went off 
clutching her manuscript, but feeling very sure 
there was a trick somewhere, about which Miss 
Converse, at least, knew nothing. She did not 
refer to the matter in one way or another when 


Shut In 


73 


she spoke to Lillian, offering her congratula- 
tions, but on the way home she said to herself, 
Perhaps some day it will be cleared up. Be- 
fore I am a Senior who knows what may hap- 
pen? I don’t see any chance at present of 
solving the mystery, but I have three years more 
in which to make discoveries.” 

Neither did she voice her disappointment to 
her sisters and Jo though -she did make a careful 
comparison of the tampered copy with the one 
from which she had taken it. Whoever did 
it was mighty clever,” she soliloquized, as she 
stowed away the papers in a portfolio. Lie 
there, you. Some day you may see the light 
again. For the present I don’t want to have 
anything to do with you.” 



f 


\ 



J 

\ 


N 








% 


t 

4 

( 



/ 



CHAPTER V 


A SET OF FURS 

Mary Lee and Jo started forth one Sunday 
afternoon armed with books and wearing 
countenances importantly serious, although they 
were chattering volubly. Nan had begged off 
from the special charity work which they were 
to undertake, pleading a headache and necessary 
home letters to write. 

“ It is well it is nothing that attacks my pocket- 
book,’’ remarked Jo. I didn’t realize till I 
really got here how many calls there would be 
upon that little flat purse of mine. I see my 
finish this year, and how I am to come out the 
next is a most nebulous problem. However, I 
am not going to cross that bridge yet awhile.” 

“ That’s the way to talk,” said Mary Lee ap- 
provingly. ‘‘ I notice you always come out on 
top, though it sometimes looks as if you would 
be snowed under.” 

‘‘ My winter wardrobe isn’t exactly up to the 
scratch,” returned Jo, ‘‘ but it will have to do, 
if I am to have any fun going into the city.” 

“ Oh, we can lend you things,” returned Mary 
Lee comfortably. 


78 The Four Corners at College 

“ Such as underwear, shoes and furs ? ” 
queried Jo ironically. “ My feet don’t match 
any of your lasts, and as for the rest, I thank 
you, but I won’t be beholden.” 

But seriously, Jo, we can help you out, and 
you should not mind it from such old and tried 
friends.” 

Oh, I’ll manage,” returned Jo lightly. I 
just happened to have those commodities on my 
mind. Don’t take me on as an extra, Mary Lee. 
I shall get along as I have always done. I think 
this must be our place.” 

They turned in at a dingy doorway to enter a 
large room where women of various ages sat 
expectantly. One of the Bettersley Seniors 
came forward to meet the girls. “ Just in 
time,” she said. “ We are going to serve tea 
first, and have the reading afterward. It would 
be a little too much to keep our guests waiting for 
their tea while we feed their minds, we think.” 

The girls passed around to the back of the 
room and out into a small closet-like apartment 
where there was a pile of cups and saucers. A 
teakettle was already placed over the alcohol 
lamp, and a supply of sandwiches and cakes 
stood ready for distribution. These were con- 
tributed by some of the college girls who also 
paid the rent of the room which was used for 
various purposes connected with the charity. 


A Set of Furs 


79 


On Saturdays a sewing-school was held there; 
on Sundays the women of the neighborhood 
gathered for tea and to listen to the reading 
given by such as might volunteer their services. 
Sometimes there was a concert, when college 
girls would sing, or would bring mandolin, violin 
or cello. 

The girls entered upon their task heartily, and 
while they were serving tea, Nan, in her room, 
was likewise offering her cups of the beverage to 
Lillian Markham and Alice Bronson who had 
stopped in to call. “ It is perfectly scandalous,” 
said Alice stirring the tea in one of Nan’s pretty 
cups. 

What is scandalous ? ” inquired Nan lessen- 
ing the flame of the lamp under her copper 
kettle. 

“ Why, haven’t you heard ? Lil has lost her 
furs, and one of the other girls her watch. The 
general impression is that both were stolen.” 

“ Sneak thieves?” inquired Nan sitting down 
to drink her own tea. 

Sneak thieves in our own dormitory, we 
are afraid. Oh, there are a number of such 
cases in the course of the year.” 

“ You don’t mean they suspect any of the 
students,” exclaimed Nan, setting down her cup 
with a shocked expression on her face. 

Looks like it. I’ll tell you all about it,” said 


8o The Four Corners at College 

Lillian. I left my furs in Bancroft 7 when 
I was going to chapel. I missed them almost 
at once, but when I went back they were gone. 
It was that cold day, Friday, wasn’t it? Lucia 
Bellows left her watch on the piano in the music 
hall and hasn’t seen it since, nor can she get 
any clue to it. One does expect to lose an um- 
brella, or overshoes and handkerchiefs, but these 
are much more serious matters.” 

What could a girl do with them ? ” inquired 
Nan. “ She couldn’t wear the furs without 
suspicion.” 

“ In a company of a thousand girls there must 
be more than one set of furs like mine,” said 
Lillian, besides, my dear innocent, there are a 
dozen ways she could dispose of them. She 
could pawn them, sell them, exchange them, to 
begin with.” 

“ I think it is perfectly dreadful,” said Nan 
distressedly. ‘‘Do you suspect anyone?” 

“ Not yet, but the next girl who appears with 
furs like mine will be liable to pretty sharp 
espionage, especially if it is known she can’t 
afford such.” 

Nan stirred her tea thoughtfully. “ That will 
be pretty hard on the innocent ones,” she re- 
marked presently. 

“ Oh, if a girl can account for them with good 
reason, or if we have actual proof that she has a 


A Set of Furs 8i 

right to them, we shall not suspect her, but 
otherwise — ” 

‘‘ What?” 

“We’ll keep a sharp watch on her from this 
time out.” 

The talk passed to other topics and soon the 
girls left. Just after Mary Lee and Jo came in 
quite enthusiastically interested in their after- 
noon’s experiences. “ You must go next time, 
Nan,” they said. “ You could at least play for 
them. Such poor sad-looking creatures some of 
them were.” 

“ Play on what ? ” 

“ The piano. To be sure it is an old one. It 
was given by one of the girls when she had a 
new one given her. It is an old-fashioned 
square piano, but it has a very good tone, and is 
not at all tin-panny,” Jo declared. 

“ And we’re going to begin at once to get 
ready for a Christmas entertainment,” Mary Lee 
told her. “ Any old clothes gratefully accepted, 
or new ones either, for that matter.” 

“To entertain with?” 

“No, goosie; to give to our poor women. 
Money will do as well, however.” 

“ Well, I will see what I can rake up,” agreed 
Nan. “Why so downcast, Jo?” 

“ I have neither money, old nor new clothes to 
give. IVe almost a mind to go and join the 


82 The Four Corners at College 

band of poor sisters myself. I might come in 
for a share of the pickings.’^ 

‘‘Poor old Jo. Is it as bad as that? I 
thought you were pretty well stocked up.” 

“So I thought, but someho\vr I do manage 
to go through my things faster than anyone 
else.” 

“ That’s because you don’t take the stitch in 
time,” said Mary Lee sedately. 

“ But I do so hate to sew, and to mend is 
worse. I do cobble so frightfully and make 
such boggling botch of things when I try to do 
anything.” 

“ Boggling botch is most euphonious,” re- 
marked Nan. “ How did you like Miss 
Perkins ? ” 

“ She is fine. She engineered the whole thing 
so tactfully, and the way she talked to those 
women was wonderful. Here come the kiddies. 
Nan.” 

Jack and Jean entered in their usual eager 
manner. “ We’re allowed to go to town by our- 
selves,” they announced triumphantly. “ Some 
of the girls aren’t, but we are.” 

“ You’ll not go without one of us,” declared 
Mary Lee with decision. 

“Why not, when Miss Lane says we may?” 
complained Jack. 

“ Because we promised mother to look after 


A Set of Furs 


83 

you/’ returned Mary Lee. “ Now, don’t say an- 
other word about it. When you have to go one 
of us will try to go with you.” 

‘‘ But suppose,” Jean argued, ‘‘ that you can’t 
or won’t go when we want to.” 

“ Then it will be time enough to discuss the 
question,” replied Mary Lee in her elder sister 
manner. 

“ What have you chicks been doing? ” in- 
quired Nan to change the subject. 

** Oh, we went to church and Sunday School, 
you know, then we had dinner and wrote to 
mother, and then we came over here. Did you 
have a good time at the dance last night. Nan? ” 
Jack was the questioner. 

Fine. All the red-headed girls were dressed 
in red, and it was very funny to see them. The 
music was good and I danced a lot.” 

We’ll be going in four years,” said Jean 
with satisfaction. “ It’s almost like being at 
college to be at the Hall, for we are so near 
and we have a kind of part in it when you and 
Mary Lee are there.” 

Nan smiled down at her. There is one 
thing we can all do together,” she said ; we can 
go driving. The country around here is beauti- 
ful, and the girls are always going off on trips. 
If it isn’t too cold or stormy we all might go next 
Saturday.” 


84 The Four Corners at College 

‘‘ On a picnic? 

Perhaps, or we can stop somewhere and 
get dinner; that might be better.” 

“ How many can go, Nan? ” 

Oh, let me see; six could if We have a roomy 
carriage. We shall have Jo, and if there is any- 
one you would especially like to ask, you may. 
But the twins were so divided in the matter of 
choice, that their sisters declared they should 
ask no one, but this raised such a storm of pro- 
test that finally they were permitted -to draw lots, 
and Jean was the triumphant winner. Jack 
pretended indifference by saying : “ Oh, I don’t 

care anyway. I was just teasing you, Jean, for 
I’d as lief have Barbara Reeves as any of the 
others.” It was never Jack’s way to admit that 
she was worsted. 

Jo had returned to her room before this and 
when the twins had taken their leave Mary Lee 
and Nan were left alone. “ We must be care- 
ful not to leave any valuables about,” Nan told 
her sister. 

“Why, what do you mean?” 

Nan related the story of Lillian’s loss. 

“How dreadful!” exclaimed Mary Lee. 
“ Could you believe we were in such a den of 
thieves ? ” 

Nan laughed. “ That is putting it pretty 
strongly. I suppose there are persons without 


A Set of Furs 85 

consciences everywhere. All is we must be care- 
ful.” 

“Does Miss Markham suspect anyone?” 

“ Not yet, but she means to be very observ- 
ant.” 

The matter passed out of their minds until 
a few days later when Jo came into their room 
bearing a large box. She was all excitement. 
“ Girls,” she cried, “ what do you think? Some- 
one has sent me a lovely set of furs.” 

“ Someone ? ” exclaimed Mary Lee. “ Don’t 
you know who it is ? ” 

“ Haven’t an idea. They came by express 
from Boston addressed very plainly to me, but 
there isn’t a card or anything to show who sent 
them.” 

“ It must be your Aunt Kitty.” 

“ Never. She hasn’t the price, in the first 
place, and even if she had she would wait till 
Christmas. You don’t catch Aunt Kit sending 
two presents when one will do. She is a dear, 
and has done lots for me, but she hasn’t a fortune 
to spend and these must have been anything but 
cheap. See, aren’t they beauties ? ” 

“ Lovely,” returned Mary Lee stroking the 
pretty muff. “ Well, Jo, probably the giver will 
announce himself or herself later. You certainly 
are in luck, for it was only Sunday that you 
were longing for furs.” 


86 The Four Corners at College 

‘‘ I know, and these are so handsome and so 
warm that I can get along perfectly without the 
coat I thought I should need. I certainly would 
like to offer my thanks to whomever has been so 
good to me, but it seems I cannot do it yet.’' 

‘‘ I wish you did know,” put in Nan, looking 
rather grave. 

But the days went by and there was no sign 
from the giver. Jo wore her furs triumphantly, 
displaying them to this and that one with inno- 
cent enjoyment. She did not often have that 
kind of satisfaction. They were lying on a chair 
in the Corner girls’ sitting-room one day when 
Lillian Markham came in. She viewed them 
interestedly as she waited for Nan. “ Some- 
body’s been getting new furs,” she remarked as 
Nan came in. Are they yours? ” 

No, those I got in Munich two years ago 
will last me for another season, I think.” 

‘‘ Your sister’s, then? ” 

“ No, she had a set at the same time. One 
does get such good furs in Munich.’^ 

‘Mf they belong to neither of you, whose are 
they?” 

‘7o Keyes’.” 

‘‘ Oh.” Lillian was silent for a moment. I 
thought you told me that Miss Keyes was far 
from well off. Didn’t you tell me that she had 
a scholarship, but that she had to eke out her 



Jo Wore Her Furs Triumphantly 



$ 


40 ^ 










. * 

1 * ’ - 


• » 

4 f 



,y \ \ 



X ' 


. * 




4 


> ’ 

f * . 


•c 


» * 


# 


A 






f 


♦ 





I 


» 



* 


t 


1 







I 

-• 




- ^ 


f * 


s 


> ( 




i' 


I ft 



I 


,t»« 

I 





I 



A Set of Furs 


87 

expenses by various means? If so, then how 
does it happen she has such expensive furs ? ” 

“ She didn’t buy them. They were given to 
her.” 

‘‘ By whom ? ” 

Nan flushed up. She resented Lillian’s curi- 
osity. She knew the reason for it, but that 
did not lessen the impertinence, she told her- 
self. 

Lillian was quick to see that she had given 
offense. ‘‘ Now, don’t get peeved, Nan,” she 
said in a conciliatory voice. You know since 
I lost my furs, I am sort of daffy on the subject. 
These are so much like mine that naturally I 
am interested. I didn’t know but that Miss 
Keyes had bought them from some one of the 
girls, and that in that way I could trace the 
theft ; that is why I asked.” 

“ I understand,” returned Nan, but she vouch- 
safed no further information on the subject, and 
it was with some feeling of concern that she 
learned later of Lillian’s pursuing her inquiries 
in other directions, and of her having learned 
that the furs were said to have been sent anony- 
mously. It likewise came to Nan’s ears that 
Lillian had made remarks, which, if not exactly 
casting suspicions upon Jo, at least suggested 
some doubts. 

Mary Lee came to lier with the tale that she 


88 The Four Corners at College 

had overheard one girl say to another : ‘‘ ‘ I’d ad- 
vise you to keep an eye on that Miss Keyes ; 
there’s a queer story about her and a set of 
furs.’ Isn’t it dreadful? ” said Mary Lee almost 
in tears. 

It is outrageous,” cried Nan, and I won’t 
have it.” 

“ What can you do ? ” 

“ I will go and have it out with Lil Markham.” 

‘‘ But, Nan, the worst of it is that you can’t 
prove anything.” 

‘‘ I can vouch for Jo. I can at least do that. 
Mary Lee, we must stand by her shoulder to 
shoulder. Don’t you dare to let anyone so much 
as whisper a word against her in your presence.” 

‘‘As if I would,” exclaimed Mary Lee in- 
dignantly. “ I didn’t know the girls or I would 
have spoken up then and there. Are you going 
now, Nan ? ” 

“ Yes, I am, just as quick as I can get there.” 
And out she went bristling with indignation. 
She found Lillian in her room, feet up on a bam- 
boo stool, a becoming kimono but half concealing 
the milky whiteness of her neck and arms. 
“ Hello, Nan,” she cried. “ Draw up, draw 
up. Why that rigid countenance and flashing- 
eye ? ” 

Nan sat down stiffly on the divan. “ I want 
to know who has been circulating malicious 


A Set of Furs 89 

stories about Jo Keyes.” She came to the point 
at once. 

“Has anyone?” 

“ Yes. Mary Lee heard one girl warning 
another against her, mentioning something about 
a set of furs. I will have you all to know that 
we have known Jo for years. She is as straight 
as a die. The only trouble is that she is too 
honest and unsuspicious. She speaks right out 
and hasn’t an idea of hiding anything when per- 
haps it would be more prudent if she were less 
expansive. Now, I want this thing stopped. 
Anyone who attacks Jo is no friend of mine or of 
my sister’s, and need not expect to be.” 

“ How fiery you are, you little Southern rebel, 
and how I love that Virginia vernacular,” 
laughed Lillian. “ I haven’t said a word against 
your friend.” 

“ Are you sure ? ” 

“ Yes, I am. I mentioned to Alice that Miss 
Keyes had furs just like those of mine that were 
appropriated, and that is the extent of my re- 
marks.” 

Nan was somewhat mollified. “ Well, Lil,” 
she said, “maybe I was a little too hasty, but I 
want you to stand up for Jo; she is worth it 
and, as I said before, whoever says anything 
against her must make up her mind to drop us.” 

“ Or be dropped,” put in Lillian. “ I promise. 


90 The Four Corners at College 

Nan. I will not say a word against her. Must 
you go ? So soon ? 

Yes, I have some things to do. Where’s 
Alice?” 

Out driving. She ought to be back by now. 
Good-by; you are a good fighter and a good 
friend, Nan.” 

On her way home Nan met Alice, and, it be- 
ing her opportunity, she said, ‘‘ I’ve just been 
to see Lil, Alice, and I want to know exactly 
what she said to you about Jo Keyes’ furs.” 

Alice looked a little embarrassed. “ Why — ” 
she hesitated, ‘‘ she only said they were exactly 
like hers.” 

‘‘Was that all? What did you say? This 
is serious, Alice, please do me the favdr to tell 
me exactly.” 

“ I said wasn’t it rather an extravagance in 
one who professed poverty, and then I asked 
her where Miss Keyes got her furs.” 

“ And she answered ? ” 

“ Nobody seems to know.” 

“ We shall find out,” replied Nan firmly, “ and 
if I ever hear that so much as a breath of sus- 
picion has been cast upon Jo — ” 

“What will you do?” Alice smiled. 

“ I’ll cut the girl dead. Please don’t let any- 
one be so cruel, Alice. Contradict it if you hear 
anyone suggesting such a thing as that Jo didn’t 


A Set of Furs 


91 


get her furs quite honestly. It is true that the 
giver has preferred to remain anonymous, but 
we know Jo like a book and she is utterly in- 
capable of doing a low and mean thing.” 

‘‘ How did the furs come to her? ” 

“ By express from Boston.” 

“ Did you see them when she opened the 
box ? ” 

‘‘ No.” 

‘‘ You have only her word for it? That is too 
bad, for there are some who might ask, and who 
are too willing to say what they think. If you 
had any proof to offer it might be easier to dis- 
arm suspicion by mentioning your proofs.” 

‘‘We have no proof at present, but we shall 
sift this to the very bottom, and in the mean- 
time you must deny, deny, deny, Alice Bronson, 
or you are no friend of any of us.” 

The girls parted, but it was only when she 
recalled the conversation that Nan remembered 
Alice had given no promise. The story was 
already whispered about, and Nan hadn’t a doubt 
that both Alice and Lillian had given the first 
impetus to it, a slight one, maybe, but suf- 
ficient to start the ill report, a report capable 
of exaggeration as it was repeated by one and 
another. Therefore it was in a distressed state 
of mind that Nan returned to her sister. The 
two girls cudgeled their brains to find a clue to 


92 The Four Corners at College 

the person who had attempted to serve Jo so 
well, but whose kind act had gone awry. They 
wrote to their mother, to their Aunt Helen, to 
their old friend Mr. Pinckney and to his grand- 
daughter, Mrs. Kirk, but all professed entire 
ignorance, and Jo, all innocent of being the sub- 
ject of a scandal, continued to wear her furs 
joyously. If any girls avoided her or spoke 
coldly, she attributed it to any other than the 
real reason; but the Corners knew, and were 
more than once made unhappy by the pointed 
slights their friend received. 


HSf 



4 



J 




$ 


% 


/ 


% 






4 


( . ^ 


? 


• V 


I 






«. 

1 

4 

t* 

4 


•i 


t 



CHAPTER VI 


A HOUSE PARTY 

“ Fve just thought of the loveliest thing to 
do,” said Mary Lee one day early in December. 

Oh, Nan, it would be such fun, and I don’t see 
why it wouldn’t be a perfectly feasible plan.” 

‘‘ What would be perfectly feasible ? ” Nan re- 
turned. ‘‘ To go to ride? It’s too cold.” 

“ You only half heard,” rejoined Mary Lee. 

I wasn’t talking about any such thing. Do put 
up that book. Nan, and listen.” 

Nan laid aside her volume of Schiller and pre- 
pared to show some interest in what her sister 
was saying. “ Go on with your scheme,” she 
said. 

‘‘ Well, you know it would be no fun to spend 
the holidays in New York when Miss Dolores and 
Mr. St. Nick are in California, and we don’t want 
to stay here, neither do we want to scatter. I 
suppose we could go home, but mother and Aunt 
Helen wouldn't be there, and it wouldn’t seem 
like Christmas there without them, so I have this 
plan. You know ever so many of the girls rent 
houses during the different holiday seasons, and 


g6 The Four Corners at College 

have house parties. Sometimes they go down 
to the shore and sometimes to Boston, or any- 
where that attracts them. I heard some Juniors 
planning to do such a thing at Christmas, and it 
occurred to me that there was no reason why we 
shouldn’t. We could have Danny and some of 
the other girls. Don’t you think it is a good 
plan? ” 

Great. I was wondering what we could 
manage to do for the kiddies and they would 
love this. Let me see; there would be the four 
Corners, with Jo, Danny, and perhaps another. 
Even if Effie couldn’t come for Christmas Day, 
she and Hermione might come later. So long 
as we can’t be with Aunt Helen and mother, it 
really doesn’t seem worth while to take the 
journey home. I declare, Mary Lee, the more I 
think of it the better I like it.” 

“If we had a chaperon we could have some of 
the boys, too, Phil, and maybe the Gordon boys. 
Hartley will be sure to join us. It would be 
great fun to have the same old crowd that was at 
camp, but I suppose I couldn’t expect them all. 
Let’s write to mother and Aunt Helen about it 
at once. Nan.” 

“ We certainly will do that and while we are 
waiting to hear, it will do no harm to trip into 
Boston and see what we can get in the way of 
a furnished house.” 


97 


A House Party 

‘‘Jolly! Don’t let’s tell anyone. I wonder 
how one would set to work to get a furnished 
house for so short a time.” 

“ I think we should look up advertisements 
as well as agents. An agent could probably give 
us a list.” 

“ When can you go, Nan? ” 

“ Let me see ; this is Thursday. I could man- 
age it on Saturday if you could.” 

“ No trouble about me. Now I will write to 
mother and you can tell Aunt Helen. I know 
they will say we can do it, but of course we must 
ask.” 

For some time they were silently occupied. 
Mary Lee was the first to finish. “ There ! ” she 
exclaimed, “ that is done and we must mail them 
at once. Hurry up, Nan. What makes you 
always write so much? I have just been 
thinking,” she went on, as she watched Nan fold 
and seal her letter, “ that maybe we could get 
Miss Wyllys to chaperon us.” 

“ You don’t mean Miss Wyllys ; you mean 
Mrs. Bradford.” 

“ Oh, yes, I forgot her married name. Very 
likely her husband is off on a cruise; naval 
officers never are at home, it seems to me. She 
was always a dear to us when she taught at the 
Wadsworth school and — How would it do to 
write, Nan ? ” 


98 The Four Corners at College 

“ I don’t think we’d better do that yet. Better 
still, we need not write at all, but can go out to 
Brookline to see her, or we could call her up on 
the ’phone.” 

‘‘ So we could. Then that is settled. I wish 
we really knew positively; there are so many 
things we shall have to do, and so many persons 
to write to.” Mary Lee was always a fore- 
handed person and hated to defer any business 
which must be given attention. 

‘‘ No use forcing things,” Nan told her. We 
shall have to wait.” 

But to Mary Lee’s satisfaction, the waiting was 
not of long duration, for, as if reading their im- 
patience, their Aunt Helen sent them a telegram 
which gave approval of the plan. ‘‘ Hurrah ! ” 
cried Nan, waving the yellow paper over her 
head, Listen to this, Mary Lee. ‘ Plan ap- 
proved. Will pay expenses, rent included, 
within three hundred dollars.’ Isn’t that great? 
That will give us one hundred and fifty dollars 
a week for two weeks, and we sure can get along 
on that. Aunt Helen always was the fairiest 
kind of a fairy godmother.” 

In the meantime the girls had gone house- 
hunting and had succeeded in finding a house 
which would serve their purpose. A family go- 
ing South wanted to rent their furnished house, 
and because no permanent tenant had been found, 


99 


A House Party 

it was offered to the girls for the time specified. 
Therefore, no sooner had the telegram been 
passed around than the telephone was kept busy 
by the two. First the agent was called up and 
the house secured, then Mrs. Bradford was 
spoken to, and fulfilled the promise which she 
had given provisionally to the girls when they 
went to see her. Next went a message to Jack 
and Jean to come over at once to hear the news, 
and then long distance to the Wadsworth school 
where Daniella Scott was, who joyfully declared 
that she would be delighted to become one of the 
party. Hermione Dearborn, too, responded by 
saying she would ask her mother, and might be 
able to come after Christmas Day. Effie Glenn 
was away at Smith College, and must be written 
to, but her brother. Hartley, could be counted 
upon. 

“ We must write to the other boys ; they might 
come. Nan,” said Mary Lee. 

'Mf they can afford it.” 

‘‘ Oh, they can afford the railroad journey if 
they can the time and they will have no hotel 
bills, you see.” 

The outcome of all this was the house party 
actually numbered fourteen for ten days of the 
holiday season. To Mary Lee’s disappointment 
their cousin Phil Lewis could not come, as he had 
planned to put in some extra work at the univer- 


100 The Four Corners at College 

sity, but Ran and Ashby Gordon appeared, and 
Dr. Paul Woods with them. The house would 
hold no more, and, as it was, there was some con- 
triving in order to accommodate everyone. 

But before these arrivals the girls had the 
house to themselves and for Christmas were but 
a party of six, for to the four Corners were 
added only Jo and Daniella. However, there 
were quite enough to make merry, to hang up 
stockings and decorate the house. Two maids 
had been secured through Mrs. Bradford’s good 
offices, and all the domestic machinery was set 
going satisfactorily before the arrival of the more 
important guests. It must be confessed that the 
girls would not have had quite so happy a day 
but for the anticipated good times, for it was 
hard to prevent a thought of their mother and 
Aunt Helen away down in Florida, and the sep- 
aration on this particular day gave them home- 
sick pangs, but they braved it through and made 
the most of having a home all to themselves, 
their very own for the time being. 

Effie joined them the next afternoon with her 
brother Hartley, and the evening brought the 
three Virginians, Dr. Paul Woods, and Ran- 
dolph and Ashby Gordon. 

‘‘ The old camp crowd ! ” cried Effie. ‘‘ Isn’t 
it good to be together again? We missed you 
last summer.” 


A House Party loi 

“ Last summer was a fizzle,” declared Ran. 

Why,” Jo turned surprised eyes upon him, 
‘‘ I think we had the jolliest sort of time down 
there in old Ferginny.” 

“ Yes, but it would have been much nicer if the 
whole crowd could have been on hand, though, 
I must say. Miss Jo, your presence made up for 
a great deal.” 

‘‘ I was just wondering what sort of pretty 
speech you would be giving to make up for the 
sweeping assertion that the whole summer was 
a fizzle,” said Jo teasingly. 

I should have qualified that assertion by the 
preface; but for you,” he said quickly. 

Very well done,” said Jo, with a twinkle in 
her eye. She well knew whom he missed. “ I 
forgive you this time, but don’t let it occur 
again.” 

As was natural the party broke up into little 
groups, most of the masculines gravitating to- 
ward some special feminine. Hartley bore off 
Daniella to a corner of the drawing-room, Ashby 
and Effie took the stairs. Ran tried for a tete-a- 
tete with Nan, but was worsted by Dr. Paul who 
took her off to the library leaving Ran to con- 
sole himself with Mary Lee, Jo, Mrs. Bradford 
and the twins. 

Nan and Dr. Paul established themselves cozily 
before an open grate fire, and many were the 


102 The Four Corners at College 

questions asked and answered before the two 
settled to personalities. It was after a short 
silence that Nan said with a little laugh, ‘‘ Isn’t 
it queer that one of my college friends is a 
cousin of your friend, Marcus Wells? ’’ 

The doctor frowned a little. ‘‘ Not so very 
much of a friend of mine. I doubt if we ever 
meet again.” 

‘‘ He is married, you know.” 

“ Yes, I had cards. Didn’t you? ” 

‘‘ No, or if I did I never knew it. They may 
have come to the family while Aunt Helen and 
I were abroad.” She smiled reminiscently, then 
looked up, the smile broadening. ‘‘ What idiots 
girls can be,” she said. 

The doctor’s face brightened. “ So you were 
not sorry to learn of his marriage.” 

‘‘ Not in the least. I think now I am rather 
glad than otherwise.” 

The doctor looked at her keenly. “ Nan, do 
you intend to take the whole college course? 
Do you think you are strong enough? ” 

“ Oh, yes, I think so. I am specializing, you 
know, and Mary Lee is a perfect old Betty about 
me ; she is not going to allow me to overtax my- 
self, you may be sure.” 

“ I wish I could persuade you to stop next 
year,” began the doctor, but just then in bounced 
Jack, and to Nan’s question of “Why?” he 


A House Party 103 

answered hastily. “ I will tell you another 
time.” 

Jack’s entrance was the signal for a general 
break up of what she was pleased to call 
"^twosing,” a performance of which she quite 
disapproved, and which she had signal success 
in altering to a general reunion in the drawing- 
room where they all frolicked till bedtime, ending 
with the making of plans for the next day which 
was to wind up with a box party at the opera. 

‘‘ You boys have never seen us all really dressed 
up,” Nan informed Ran, for we are together 
only in summer when we are either at camp or 
at home, and in neither place is proper evening 
dress in order.” 

‘‘ And you have never been to one of the 
University dances,” complained Ashby. 

‘‘ We can’t forego the delights of our own 
schools, you see. When you boys are graduated 
we will come,” Mary Lee promised. 

‘‘ See that you do,” cried Ran. “ I hold you 
to that, Mary Lee. This is my last year, re- 
member.” 

“ So it is. And then what shall you do ? ” 

Go abroad for a year to study German 
music,” said Ran gravely, and then come home 
to hang out my shingle.” 

“ Are you really going to study German 
music? I thought you meant to be a lawyer,” 


104 The Four Corners at College 

spoke up Jean. Then all laughed but Nan, who 
looked a little annoyed and quickly changed the 
subject. 

It may have been Ran’s remark which caused 
her to turn to Dr. Paul for escort to the opera, 
an arrangement whose result she did not foresee, 
or she would probably have done otherwise. 

The girls decided to wear their most fetching 
costumes and appeared at dinner in full regalia. 
The twins were not going to the opera but had 
accepted an invitation to spend the evening with 
one of their classmates who was at home from 
Rayner Hail for the holidays. 

Mrs. Bradford looked over the little company 
proudly. I don^t believe anyone will chaperon 
a nicer looking crowd this night,” she remarked 
to Dr. Paul. 

‘‘ I certainly agree with you so far as the ladies 
are concerned,” he returned. 

Nan wore her favorite pink gown, anl looked 
her best. Mary Lee’s pale lavender frock set 
off her blonde prettiness to perfection. She had 
lent Jo, who had nothing quite good enough for 
the occasion, a white costume which was very be- 
coming. Mary Lee was determined that Jo should 
appear as well as the rest, and had made her try 
on frocks not a few before deciding that this was 
the one in which she looked the best. Daniella, 
also in white, was so beautiful that Nan declared 


A House Party 105 

she would rather look at her than at the stage. 
Effie appeared well in her costume of delicate 
green. She was not particularly pretty, and by 
the side of such brilliancy as Daniella’s might 
have been overlooked except that she had a cer- 
tain style and always dressed with extreme 
elegance. Ashby was her special gallant. Hart- 
ley, who had never wavered from his first alle- 
giance to Daniella, devoted himself to her. Dr. 
Paul and Nan started off together, while Ran 
escorted Mary Lee and Mrs. Bradford. On the 
return home, however, Nan whispered to Mrs. 
Bradford, “ Please come with us.” And Mrs. 
Bradford, seeing that the girl looked very pale, 
imagined that she was not feeling well, and that 
it accounted for her silence during the ride back. 

But it was Jo who penetrated to the meaning 
of Nan’s silence and Dr. Paul’s gravity, which 
had been unmoved by any of the amusing things 
on the stage, so responsively laughed at by the 
rest. 

The girl must go right to bed ; she is all 
tired out,” Mrs. Bradford had said when all were 
once more gathered in the house. The rest of 
you can stay up and lose your beauty sleep if 
you like, though my advice is for all of you to 
go that you may be fresh for to-morrow.” 
Therefore, taking her advice, they all traveled 
up-stairs. 


io6 The Four Corners at College 

For a few minutes Jo, who roomed with Nan, 
chatted gayly of the opera, of what fun it had 
been to have a box to themselves, and wasn't it 
lovely to be all dressed up and to feel that you 
looked your best? But presently she came up 
close to Nan and said abruptly. “ What is the 
matter ? Are you ill ? 

“ No. I am a little tired, maybe." 

That isn’t all." Jo regarded her critically. 

Nan said nothing. 

‘‘ Nan," Jo went on, “ did I hear Dr. Paul say 
he was going back to-morrow? Did I? Are 
you sending him ? " 

The tears arose to Nan’s eyes and she held up 
her hand as if to ward off Jo’s accusing look. 
For once the latter’s face bore no suggestion of 
piquant mischief. 

“ Don’t," said Nan. “ Oh, Jo, I couldn’t help 
it. Dear old Dr. Paul," she faltered, “ I feel so 
sorry for him." 

Jo stood over her silently searching her face. 
Then her own lips trembled and she suddenly 
dropped to the floor, covered her face with her 
hands, and burst into tears, sobbing so pitifully 
that Nan forgot her own trouble. She leaned 
over and put her hand on Jo’s shoulder. Jo, 
dear," she said, “ what are you crying for? " 

‘‘ How could you hurt him so ? How could 
you?" sobbed Jo. “The best, kindest man in 


A House Party 107 

the world, who has been so good to you, to me, 
to us all? ’’ 

“ I know, I know,” murmured Nan, ‘‘ and that 
is why it hurt me so. Nothing ever hurt me in 
quite the same way. Dear good Dr. Paul.” 

Jo looked up with moist eyes and seized Nan’s 
wrist. You must love him,” she said fiercely. 

You’ve got to. You can’t help it.” 

“ I wish I couldn’t help it,” returned Nan 
mournfully. I’ve tried very hard, for — for 

— I—” 

You have known it all along.” 

Not all along.” 

‘‘ But for some time. I knew all along, and I 
have prayed, yes, prayed, that at last you would 
learn to appreciate him.” 

‘‘ I do appreciate him, and I love him very much 

— as a friend. I can see his noble qualities, all his 
gentle characteristics, all his manliness and good- 
ness and dearness. I value his friendship beyond 
words, but — oh, I have tried, I have, Jo ; give 
me credit for that.” 

“And you never can? Perhaps, after a 
while.” 

Nan shook her head. “ No, never. Not in 
that way.” Then she herself dropped on the 
floor by Jo’s side. “ Dear old Jo,” she said, 
“ perhaps, after a while — ” 

“ No, no, no,” cried Jo. “ Don’t say such 


io8 The Four Corners at College 

things. How can you, when he is so un- 
happy ? ” 

‘‘ But I don’t want him to be unhappy. I want 
you to console him.” 

Jo covered her face with her hands again. 

Don’t say such things,” she said indistinctly. 
“As if I were worthy, a careless, slangy, crude, 
disorderly, horrid creature like me, when he is 
such a wonderful, courteous, noble gentleman.” 

Nan smiled. “ Don’t be too humble, Jo, dear. 
You don’t have to be any of those things you 
call yourself. Don’t be so consumed with hu- 
mility ; it isn’t wise. You have hundreds of good 
points. He likes you immensely already. He 
has told me so dozens of times. Cheer up, old 
girl, there’s light ahead. I am feeling better 
already.” 

“ Oh, but you,” said Jo significantly though 
hopelessly. 

Nan smiled again, and sat pondering over the 
situation. “ He mustn’t go to-morrow,” she 
said presently. “ I’ll try to persuade him not 
to.” 

“Oh, Nan.” 

“ Yes, I will. There is no sense in his run- 
ning away; it may arouse the suspicions of the 
rest. This is a dead secret between you and 
me, Jo, all that we have been saying; but remem- 
ber, I am your loyal, faithful friend whatever 


A House Party 109 

you may believe. Come, let’s go to bed, we shall 
be rags to-morrow after this excitement.” 

The excitement was truly too much for Nan, 
as she awoke with a bad headache. She con- 
cluded not to get up for breakfast, but she con- 
cocted a little note which she entrusted to Jo’s 
care, cautioning her to give it to Dr. Paul when 
no one was by. This Jo did, and if Dr. Paul 
read sympathy in Jo’s speaking, anxious little 
face, he was only grateful and not resentful. 

“ Nan has a bad headache, I am sorry to tell 
you,” said Jo. 

The doctor looked down at the note thought- 
fully, then his professional instincts came to the 
front. Do you know if she has any of those 
tablets I prescribed for her last year ? ” 

“Yes, she has taken one; I gave it to her.” 

“ You remembered, of course. You are a born 
nurse. Miss Jo. Well, tell her she’d better not 
attempt to get up. Rest is what she needs, rest 
and quiet.” 

“Is that all I shall tell her?” queried Jo. 
“ She would like to know — ” she paused. 
“ Shall I tell her you are quite up to snuff — 
I mean that you are feeling fit, as they say in 
England ? and — and could you send word what 
you are going to do to-day?” 

The doctor smiled a little wistfully. “ If you 
think it would help her you may say that I am 


no The Four Corners at College 

feeling quite fit and that I hope to see her down 
by this evening.’' 

A glad light leaped to Jo’s face. “ Then you 
are not — ” she paused helplessly. I’m so 
glad,” she murmured. 

The doctor looked at her kindly. ‘‘ That’s 
mighty good of you, Miss Jo. I don’t believe 
I need to disguise facts, for I see you have dis- 
covered that I thought of going home to-day. 
Believe me that I didn’t mean to run away be- 
cause of cowardice, but because I thought it 
would make it easier for Nan.” 

“ Nan takes things very hard,” replied Jo. 
‘‘ She didn’t tell me. Dr. Paul. Don’t think 
that. I guessed, I couldn’t help knowing, I saw 
it in her face and in yours. Please forgive me.” 

“ For having intuitions ? My dear little girl, 
I would then have to forgive you for being a 
very sweet womanly person.” 

'‘It is a secret, quite a sacred secret,” Jo went 
on. “ You believe that, don’t you ? ” 

“Of course I do.” 

“ But,” Jo continued, “ if you would feel, — 
if you cared to talk to me about it, — if it would 
help—” 

“ You would be as sympathetic a confidante as 
I could find. I fully believe that. Thank you. 
Miss Jo. I appreciate your goodness more than 
I can say.” 


Ill 


A House Party 

“ You were mighty good to me there in 
Munich/’ said Jo gravely. “ You saved me from 
a horrid sort of affair. I shall never forget 
that.” 

But I shall,” returned the doctor smiling. 

You were only a little girl, and it would be 
very unfair to remember all that little school- 
girls do.” 

Jo looked up with clear eyes. Thank you,” 
she said. 

We are going to be good friends. Nan and 
I,” the doctor went on. “ You can tell her that, 
and as I may not be the best of company during 
my stay here, I may take advantage of your 
kindness by asking you to put up with me on 
occasions when it would be hard to join the 
others. It is asking a great deal of you, but 
will you do it ? ” He held out his hand. 

As Jo let her small fingers lie in his firm nerv- 
ous clasp, the expression of her face told that 
she meant what she said as she answered, “ I 
shall be very glad. It will be no sacrifice on my 
part.” 

Then she flew up-stairs to Nan, and threw 
herself on the bed by her friend’s side. ‘‘ He is 
going to stay. Nan,” she cried. “ Oh, Nan, you 
are an angel to me, and oh. Nan, he knows that 
I know, and oh, perhaps I can comfort him a 
little.” Then she repeated the conversation 


1 12 The Four Corners at College 

which had just taken place, and Nan’s smile be- 
came a laugh as Jo concluded. 

‘‘ It is just as I hoped,” she said to herself, 
though she was wise enough to remark to Jo, 
Well, my dear, see that you chirk him up in 
your very best manner. No one could be better 
fitted for such a mission. I shall not get up to- 
day. Go down and entertain the company. 
Give me a book or two and let me alone. I shall 
do very well.” 



i 



CHAPTER VII 


MAY DAY 

The remainder of the Christmas holidays went 
pleasantly enough. True to his promise Dr. 
Paul stayed on, and though he was not obtrusively 
attentive to Nan he so guided his actions that 
none suspected the real condition of affairs, and 
the two parted with a compact of friendship 
which comforted Nan not a little. 

Time sped rapidly during the rest of the win- 
ter. There was so much to do, so many new in- 
terests cropping up, so many new friendships 
forming, that romantic attachments held little 
place. However, once in a while Nan was both 
amused and touched to see evidences of Jo’s de- 
votion to Dr. Paul. She made superhuman 
efforts to conquer her tendency to use slang, she 
toiled to overcome her natural disorderliness, 
and one day she came humbly to Nan and begged 
that she would teach her to sew neatly. I 
never was taught anything like that,” she said, 
‘‘and if you wouldn’t mind once in a while 
showing me how to do things properly, I would 
be so grateful.” 


ii6 The Four Corners at College 

“ You dear thing/' cried Nan, ‘‘of course Til 
show you. Suppose/' she went on, with sudden 
inspiration, “ we do our charity work by mak- 
ing garments for the settlement. We can meet 
one afternoon a week and sew for an hour. 
Mary Lee does all kinds of needlework so beauti- 
fully that she will be a model, and we'll accom- 
plish ever so much." This plan was carried 
out and ultimately was a great help to aspiring 

Jo. 

Dr. Paul wrote once in a while to Jo though 
the correspondence was not kept up very regu- 
larly. Nan, be it said, was no longer the recipi- 
ent of the letters which had never failed of com- 
ing once a week. If she missed them she said 
nothing, and by degrees turned to Jo for news 
of this old friend. 

From time to time some festivity would arouse 
all the enthusiasm of the Freshmen, fast ap- 
proaching their Sophomore year. The Juniors 
gave them a play, then the Freshmen themselves 
arose to the heights of preparing a drama over 
which both Jo and Nan worked faithfully with 
the others, Mary Lee was a devotee to basket ball 
and was one of the winners in the year’s con- 
test. Nan was not allowed to train for the boat 
races, but was fast regaining her strength and 
hoped yet to take her place with the college crew. 

With the Spring Pageant and May Day just 


II7 


May Day 

ahead the girls were looking forward to the great 
frolics of which they had heard so many tradi- 
tions. The twins, though they had their own 
festivities, envied the May Day of their sisters, 
for one day Mary Lee and Nan arrived at Rayner 
Hall to borrow short frocks in which to appear 
the following day, and their account of what 
they intended to do made Jack sigh for the un- 
attainable. 

When the hour arrived Jo showed herself with 
hair strained back from her forehead and stand- 
ing out in pigtails behind. She had on copper- 
toed shoes, — where she got them she would not 
tell — a long-sleeved blue gingham apron, a 
yellow frock and red stockings. She carried a 
slat sunbonnet, which she wore at intervals, and 
a truer type of a hobbledehoy it would be hard to 
find. Nan braided her hair down her back and 
wore one of Jack’s frocks. Mary Lee was the 
daintiest of small persons with her fair hair in 
curls, and one of Jean’s white frocks made even 
more juvenile by the addition of a sash. She 
carried a Teddy bear, Jo supplied herself with 
a wonderful rag doll, and Nan discoursed once 
in a while upon a mouth organ. 

“ Hurry up, girls,” cried Jo, putting her head 
in at the door. “We don’t want to miss seeing 
the Seniors roll their hoops to chapel. Dear me, 
I wonder if I shall know how to roll a hoop 


ii8 The Four Corners at College 

when the time comes. It is years now since I 
did it.” 

Myself the same,” responded Mary Lee. 

I think I might be able to play marbles or skip 
the rope with more ease.” 

‘‘We are going to try all those things to- 
day,” said Nan, giving a flourish upon her mouth 
organ. “ Come along, kids. Little Nanny is 
going a-Maying.” 

Jo went boisterously down stairs, and with a 
squeal, as of one just let loose from school, ran 
up the street, Mary Lee after her, curls flying 
and blue sash floating. For the first moments 
Nan felt that she must act with more decorum, 
but by the time she had caught sight of the May- 
pole and the lemonade stand, she was ready to 
perform any childish trick. 

“ It is funny and yet it is pathetic, too,” she 
said to someone by her side as they watched 
the Seniors at their hoop-rolling. “ It is so near 
the end for them.” 

“ That is quite true,” returned her companion, 
Rita Converse, who, in short sailor suit with big 
bows upon her hair, seemed much more approach- 
able than when she appeared as the dignified 
president of the Euterpe Club. “ I shall be do- 
ing the same thing next year. I can hardly 
realize that I shall soon be no longer a Junior.” 

“ I should have been looking forward to 


May Day 119 

stepping into the Junior class myself if all had 
gone well,” remarked Nan. 

“ I heard something about that. How was 
it?” 

Nan told her and then they joined the others. 
Miss Converse saying as she walked away, “ I 
invite you to a game of tag this afternoon.” 

The afternoon saw everything in full swing, 
shouts of laughter, infantile “ Ring ” songs, 
mingling with the blatant tones of a street organ, 
while the girls who had stepped back a decade 
for the time being, threw dignity to the winds 
and frolicked unceasingly. 

It was a sight to see Jo racing after someone 
who had snatched her rag doll, to see Mary Lee, 
standing shyly in the middle of a ring waiting to 
“ Choose the one that you love best,” to see Nan’s 
long legs wildly escaping from someone who 
tried to tag” her while she sucked frantically 
at a mint stick. Tall Lillian Markham was carry- 
ing little Alice Bronson around in her arms while 
Emily and Madge were playing leap-frog to the 
amusement of lookers-on. 

For some reason Rita Converse had singled 
out Nan for a playmate. She was a tall girl 
with an interesting rather than a beautiful face, 
and Nan had always been attracted to her. After 
their wild game of tag the two stopped to rest by 
the lake. Lillian Markham tells me that you 


120 The Four Corners at College 

have spent a good deal of time abroad/^ said 
Miss Converse. 

‘‘ Yes, we were there a year the first time and 
my aunt and I were four months in Great 
Britain last summer.” 

And of all the places you have seen which 
did you enjoy the most?” 

“ Oh, Munich. I liked it the best of all. We 
spent six months or more there. I did enjoy the 
music in Germany so very much. I have long- 
ings to go back every now and then.” 

“ Then we have a common bond of interest,” 
said Miss Converse with an eager smile. “ I 
was born in Germany and was partly educated 
in Munich.” 

“ Really? ” Nan turned and looked at her as 
if she were quite a new discovery. ‘‘ I studied 
there, too, special things, like music, history, 
German and mathematics. I had a wonderful 
teacher of music, and, take it all in all, I never 
enjoyed studying anywhere so much as there. 
You were born in Germany? Yet your name 
is not German.” 

No, my father was consul there for a number 
of years, but his health failed and he resigned, 
then we traveled about for a year or two. He 
died in Italy and then we came to America. My 
mother's parents live in Philadelphia and we live 
with them.” 


May Day 121 

“ It is a wonder, then, that you did not go to 
Bryn Mawr.” 

“ One of my mother’s dearest friends is pro- 
fessor here, and as I was the ewe lamb of the 
family it was thought I needed a shepherdess 
within hail. My mother spent the first year here 
with me, but when I was fully established within 
the college yard she thought best to let me work 
out my own development as others do.” 

“ And when you are graduated, what shall you 
do?” 

“ We may go abroad again for a year, or 
even for only a few months. My mother gets 
homesick for the old places and friends. She 
was very happy over there, but I am afraid 
it will be a sorrowful sort of pleasure to go 
back.” 

‘‘ It is always like that, they say, though my 
aunt and I spent last summer in Great Britain 
and revisited many places we had seen earlier, but 
I don’t think we found they had lost any of their 
charm. I suppose in your mother’s case it would 
mean more, however.” 

I have thought a good deal about that little 
song of yours,” said Miss Converse suddenly. 

Did you find out that you had sent in the 
wrong copy? I have always been sorry it hap- 
pened so, but there appeared no way to alter 
matters as the circumstances stood.” 


122 The Four Corners at College 

Nan was silent for a moment before she said, 
“ Never mind, don’t let us talk of it.’^ 

‘‘ But I want to talk of it.” Miss Converse 
laid her hand on Nan’s arm. “ Please tell me.” 

Nan hesitated, but presently she said. “ Miss 
Converse, believe me or not, the manuscript I 
sent in was quite different from that I received 
back. Several alterations for the worse had been 
made, but not by me.” 

‘‘ I am distressed beyond words,” said Miss 
Converse after a moment, ‘‘ and I shall do my 
best to get at the truth of this. Do you suspect 
anyone ? ” 

‘‘No. How could I? I have no means of 
knowing into whose hands the manuscript may 
have fallen.” 

“ But I have, and I shall take pains to make 
an investigation. I want to see more of you, 
Miss Corner. We have so much in common, 
and from the first I have felt that I should like to 
be your friend. Won’t you come to my room 
and have tea, say, day after to-morrow? Please 
bring the song; I want very much to see it.” She 
spoke so earnestly that Nan was forced to con- 
sent. 

They sat and talked for some time, Nan dis- 
covering that Miss Converse spoke German as 
fluently as she did English, and that she had 
possessed an eager love of music from her very 


May Day 123 

infancy. Their talk was interrupted by a band 
of frolickers who routed them out of their 
sheltered nook and dragged them forth to play 
a game of hide-and-seek. Every now and then a 
class yell rent the air, or they would come upon 
a group lustily singing a class song, and when 
night fell all gathered upon the steps of the 
chapel to join in their college songs. At last 
May Day was over, and a tired though happy 
crowd of girls put aside childish things and went 
to bed. 

One celebration followed another in close 
succession, and the days passed so rapidly that as 
Jo said they were Sophomores before they had 
become used to being Freshmen. 

In the weeks following May Day, Nan had 
become more intimate with Rita Converse, and 
told herself that at last she had found a truly 
congenial soul, the only drawback being that 
Rita would spend but one more year at Betters- 
ley. By degrees Nan’s admiration for Lillian 
Markham had cooled, and the climax came one 
afternoon when she found herself in the midst 
of a gayer company than she had ever been 
thrown with. A bridge party with wine flow- 
ing, cigarettes smoked openly, and reckless lan- 
guage was not to her liking. Lillian was queen 
of the feast, and laughed at Nan for being a 
prude. ‘‘What’s the use of living if you can’t 


124 The Four Corners at College 

have a good time ? ” was Lillian’s question when 
Nan expostulated with her later. 

But it isn’t my idea of a good time,” Nan 
told her. 

“ Oh, you are a regular old Puritan,” said 
Lillian. Wait till you see more of the world, 
and you will learn how to live.” 

“ I shall never live in the kind of world you 
appear to like,” returned Nan with spirit. “ I 
prefer a very different one, and I don’t want to 
go any further into the one you have shown me 
a glimpse of. It isn’t my kind.” 

“ I wouldn’t have thought you were so goody- 
goody,” returned Lillian. I really thought 
you were old enough to know something of 
what goes on outside of the nursery, but you 
are still a very young Freshman, I see. You 
will broaden out in a few years, my dear.” 

Nan made no reply, though she was annoyed 
at this point of view, and from this time out 
saw less and less of Lillian. Once or twice, to 
be sure, Lillian reproached her by saying, “ You 
don’t love me any more. Nan.” 

But Nan gave her a flippant answer, and 
walked away. Later on Rita Converse asked her 
suddenly, ** Do you like Lillian Markham ? ” 

“Why, do you?” Nan parried the question. 

“ No.” Rita was quite frank. “ I admit 
that she can be very fascinating, but I don’t like 


125 


May Day 

that fast crowd. When I first saw that you were 
indentifying yourself with them, I decided that 
you must be one of the same stripe, though you 
didn’t look it, but when I came to know you 
better, I saw that I was mistaken. Let me tell 
you. Nan, in college, as elsewhere, a girl is known 
by the company she keeps.” 

‘‘ I didn’t know she was that kind at first,” 
said Nan slowly. “ She was one of the ver}^ 
earliest to seek me out, she and Alice Bronson, 
and to pay me attention or to invite me any- 
where. I found her quite charming, but it is 
only very lately that I have discovered that she 
does things I don’t approve of. Her music is 
what attracted me in the beginning.” 

‘‘ Yes, that is her saving grace, and is her 
best means of getting a hold upon those girls 
whom she wants to attract. She is too good a 
musician not to be admitted to the Euterpe Club, 
you see, yet there are many who wish she were 
not a member.” 

“ Do you think — ” Nan began. 

“ That she had anything to do with altering 
your song? No, I do not. She has her faults, 
but I don’t think she would stoop to that. I 
am afraid we shall never solve that mystery, for 
there is absolutely no proof. You must try 
again next year. Nan, and I will see to it that 
there is no repetition of the disaster. I could 


126 The Four Corners at College 

weep when I think of it, for your song, as it 
now stands, is far and away the best of any 
submitted/' 

Nan thrilled under this praise, for Miss Con- 
verse was a thorough musician, as well as a 
critic. “ I shall try to work hard over com- 
position and harmony this summer,” she said. 

Where shall you be ? ” 

“ Oh, we have determined to be in our old 
Virginia home where I shall have my own be- 
loved piano. We shall take some of our friends 
down with us. I should love to have you, if 
you could come, Rita.” The two had long be- 
fore fallen into the habit of calling each other 
by the first name. 

“ I should like to go, but my blessed mother 
claims me, and my grandparents would think 
the skies must fall if I didn’t go with them to a 
certain island off the coast of Maine where they 
have a cottage. Don’t you find it rather warm 
in Virginia ? ” 

“ Sometimes, though we are near the moun- 
tains and the nights are always cool. After 
three-fourths of a year in New England, I think 
I shall not mind the heat or anything else. We 
do have jolly good times when we all get to- 
gether. Some day I must tell you about my 
first musical composition, and of how I came to 
get my piano.” 


May Day 127 

You always have a lot of interesting things 
to tell,” remarked Rita. 

‘‘ So do you,” returned Nan, and they both 
laughed. 

June saw an end to college life for a time, and 
a merry party started for the Virginia moun- 
tains. The four Corners, Jo, and Daniella 
reached the old town to find the Gordon boys, 
Phil Lewis and Dr. Paul all drawn up in line 
waiting for them to alight from the train. Each 
grabbed a bag of the arriving maidens, and 
they were borne off in triumph. Nan noticing 
to her amusement that it was Dr. Paul who 
possessed himself of Jo’s satchel though he had 
Jack’s too. How familiar it all looked. There 
was the court-house, the church spire, further on 
the university, and then the old brown house with 
the blue mountains stretching away along the 
cloudless line of blue sky. 

“ I see Aunt Sarah,” cried Jean. “ And there 
are mother and Aunt Helen at the gate. Oh, 
Nan, if there isn’t Lady Grey. I was afraid 
she wouldn’t be alive; she is getting to be such 
an old cat.” 

Is that Mitty ? ” asked Nan as a round 
woolly head appeared over the fence. “ Why, 
of course it is. She has grown so I didn’t know 
her. See, she is grinning from ear to ear. 
Howdy, Mitty! Coming in. Ran, of course.” 


128 The Four Corners at College 


‘‘Just for a moment. We stayed over to see 
you all, you know, and are putting up at the 
coloners.'' 

“Of course, I forgot that we had routed you 
all out of here. I suppose Aunt Sarah didn't 
leave you a spot to call your own.'’ 

Ran laughed. “ She did hustle us about some- 
what, but we didn't mind, for we knew it was in 
a good cause." 

“ You aren’t going all the way home to-night, 
are you?" inquired Jean. 

“ Oh, no. We shall hang on for a day or 
two, and we shall be coming back and forth 
all summer. I have some work to do in the 
library, and I think that will keep me a good 
part of the time." 

The gate was now reached. There were 
welcoming hugs and kisses, a great chattering, 
a feeling of warmth and joy and content filling 
each heart as all gathered once more under the 
shelter of the old home. A free and glorious 
summer was before the little company of girls 
and boys. What hopes might not its promise 
fulfill? What glad hours might it not contain? 







TO 











Jt 74 '! 


V AW./ '\ 


>}4 • 


S - 




S^ag' ■t* ua 

fo^' ' ' ■ rm 

<:^&*SJimm:''.i:<ry'miki\^ ■' 




'.*■■■■'> ,v 


. - v, ,v 7 ■'; 




Wl 




p!}?n 

1^' i 

i£^iv 't 

* 'W , , 

fc - / . ' ' 




•r 


m: ' ■ ■ 






ri ■. 1 




‘ A 




■' /.V ^ ' 

^;!i:,,: ■H r.y 


p^' ' ;| ■ 




*■7® ^ • ■ , 

'*!•'< . A *♦! 




f. ( -'V.)^' 


:1<1 


'i''* 




/ti-i 




irv.-,,s'..‘vrt-iA -i 


. 0 , 




f </ 


s . 


MtWfrr '• • ')• '7 T v/ri i\\ ■ . 

Wmmi 

^'■Vv'' ‘ ^ ->/ *-*',■% ' < 13 : > ' If' . ■'®^- 

SiKI^A'r ' ^. 1 '. 7 ,. r ■ 


Wyii 


tii'A 




?,-::;iii.iif* 



i . . 






to A ■ . , ..;f r ' 


y 


‘'^■: / '•'. VI V 


!%• 


;T >; 


ii' 


L' 'I 




■< ^v 


)' ..r 


I 


■' il 




'It 


I • ‘I 






It 




I y.' 


F%ii 




I'* 


:fr,v 


Hi-’ 




f* 


.«.C. 


>7#fJ 




* 


9im'K: 








. .•y* T.t ' * ' ’ ‘mM vv' ^ " u f 
‘^/y. 1. . . 


Hi 




'it- 


ifir.^v ' V'i ; ' '/.' '’■ ’ 

^v.- ' y."' ■' 'V '^> ■ '' 

,s.;^(.'. L' >' ''•. ■';.' ii' A.'iftU -/,•* 


i> y.i 


» \ 


•%> ^ 


:.i>,i' 


^ P' ' ■• ' ■ ' •■■" ’ ■' ' ■ '■ /.if '■ Vvl 

*' ^'•''v.\ /• y^'/.'-'i' »/■ tv, , ' .! / . ' '.Viv'tj'.^' ■'>'i : •■■i^ 




N ■ 


I . 




i j 


* — t 


> (. 


7 i ry 




[jj 




f 







■ .,' ' ' V; ■ ' - ', / , : ■:■■'" 'i ', 


:v'.. ' ; 





y • . • 

/ ^ I t 


■ ••! 
/-» 


"7 l/r. '" / W 5 RPH 

t-.. i ■ x,V ■ ' 



J / . 


C<P‘ 4 ,v.fe:. 


.'rr. 


L^V 







CHAPTER VIII 


SOPHOMORES 

‘‘Sophomores! and arrived at the dignity of 
quarters in a dormitory. Aren’t we advan- 
cing? ” said Mary Lee as they viewed the rooms 
which were to be occupied by herself and sister. 
“ Sorry to get back, Nan ? ” 

“ No, I can’t say that I am, yet we did have 
a glorious old time there at home this summer, 
didn’t we?” 

“ Yes, I don’t believe I ever had a happier 
one. I have been thinking, Nan, that the very 
first thing we must do is to blazon abroad that 
we have discovered the giver of Jo’s furs. We 
want to begin the year with that matter 
thoroughly understood.” 

“ We certainly must,” returned Nan. “ We’ll 
inform everyone we meet and have Jo start in 
with a clear sky over her.” 

“ She didn’t know about it, do you think? ” 

“ Not at first. She imagined that she was set 
aside because of other reasons, because she was 
poor or because she was a little boisterous, but 
at last I am sure that she knew. Poor old Jo! 


132 The Four Corners at College 

It was an outrageous shame, but did you ever 
see anyone improve so much as she has done in 
this last year? 

“ She certainly has improved immensely. 
She doesn’t use any more slang than the rest 
of us, and that laugh of hers, that used to wake 
the echoes, has become so subdued that one 
doesn’t notice that it is anything more than mirth- 
ful.” 

“ There is a knock, Mary Lee. Don’t forget, 
if it is one of the girls, to start up the news 
about the furs.” 

Mary Lee opened the door to Rita Converse. 
“ Welcome, friends of the sister class,” she said. 

“ Welcome, first caller,” responded Nan. 
“ Come in and be seated if you can find a chair 
in all this jumble. We are getting unpacked, as it 
seems superfluous to state. How are you, Rita? 
You had a nice summer, didn’t you? Are you 
glad to get back ? ” 

Miss Converse laughed. ‘‘ Let me see.” 
She touched the first finger of one hand with 
the other. First; I am very glad to get back; 
second ; I had a lovely and restful summer, and 
third; I am both glad and sorry to get back. 
It means the beginning of the end, my last year. 
I shall be glad to have completed my course and 
to get back to my dear mother, but I hate to think 
of leaving these halls of fame forever, and it will 


Sophomores 133 

be sad to part from all those I have become 
so fond of. How are you all? Ready for 
work?’’ 

“ Oh, yes.” 

** Did Miss Keyes come back with you? ” 

‘‘ Yes ; we all came together. She spent the 
summer with us, you remember, and our friend, 
Daniella Scott was there, too. We had a very 
jolly crowd and an awfully good time. Three 
boy cousins to dance attendance, and another of 
our friends with whom we have been intimate 
all our lives, so you may imagine what the eight 
of us could do in the way of having good times. 
By the way, speaking of Jo Keyes, do you re- 
member my telling you last year that she never 
could find out who sent her that handsome set 
of furs? Well, we discovered the giver this 
summer.” 

‘‘You did?” Miss Converse looked inter- 
ested. “ Tell me, Nan.” 

“ It was Daniella Scott. I don’t know why 
we never thought of her, for it was just like her 
to do it, and in just that way. She is one of 
the never-let-your-right-hand-know-what-your- 
left-hand-does kind. I’ve told you about 
Daniella, of how we discovered her, a little wild 
mountain girl, of her uncle who had adopted her, 
and all that. Well, Mr. Scott gives Daniella a 
handsome allowance and she is always doing 


134 The Four Corners at College 

something for someone. We never would have 
found out about the furs but that we told her of 
our efforts to discover the giver, and of how poor 
dear Jo had been under suspicion — you knew 
that, Rita.'' 

“ Yes, I knew," replied Miss Converse. “ Go 
on." 

“ Well, it seems one cold day last fall Jo and 
Dan met to go to a matinee in the city, and 
Dan noticed that Jo had no furs, and learned that 
she had no hope of getting any. To be without 
furs in this climate is little short of dreadful. 
A little later Mr. Scott sent Dan a fat check 
to buy furs for herself, and what does the 
blessed child do but divide it and get Jo's furs 
with a part of the money and her own with the 
rest. I venture to say that if there is any dif- 
ference Jo's are the better ones. Well, she was 
afraid that Jo wouldn’t accept them, if she gave 
them outright, so she had them sent directly 
from the shop, and kept the whole matter to her- 
self. I don’t see why it never occurred to us 
that she might have sent them, for we thought 
of every other possible person. Even when we 
were all there together at Christmas, Danny never 
opened her lips about the furs. I wish we had 
hinted to her then about the trouble Jo was 
getting into, but we felt sensitive about mention- 
ing it." 


Sophomores 135 

“ Oh, Rita,” Mary Lee broke in, you will 
do all you can, won’t you? to contradict that 
horrid tale, and reinstate Jo in everyone’s good 
opinion. You don’t know how brave she is. 
She lost her mother when she was a tot, and now 
her stepmother has a big family of children to 
think of, so Jo doesn’t get any sort of comfort 
from her home. She has no allowance, no one 
to help her out of her troubles, to make it worth 
while, and she has such a lot of courage. Her 
aunt is the only member of the family who takes 
a particle of interest in her, but she isn’t so very 
well off and has a family of her own. She did 
get this scholarship for Jo, and does what she 
can in giving her things to wear.” Mary Lee 
paused to take breath after this long recital. 

Of course I will do my best,” replied Miss 
Converse heartily. “ I am very glad you told 
me all this, for I confess to having been preju- 
diced against Miss Keyes. All sorts of tales 
have come to my ears, but I have no doubt that 
all are, at the very least, exaggerations. Tell me 
more of your friend. She is clever?” 

‘‘ Very,” Mary Lee answered, and always so 
bright and cheerful. Whatever mistakes she 
may have made are only those of a girl who 
has been allowed to grow up like a weed. Till 
she went to Miss Barnes’s school she had never 
had any chance at all, but she improves year by 


136 The Four Corners at College 

year, and I am sure you will think that even since 
last year she has made great strides. At her 
best she is the most original and entertaining 
girl I know.’’ 

‘‘ And has such loyal and loving comrades she 
couldn’t fail of being influenced by them,” re- 
turned Miss Converse with a smile. ‘‘ Well, 
girls, I will start the ball rolling, and if you 
think it would add anything to an understand- 
ing of the matter I shall be delighted to have you 
bring Miss Keyes to my room on Friday. I’m 
going to have some girls in to have tea, and I 
want you both to be there. You’ll come, won’t 
you? ” 

“ In the words of the immortal Teddy, ‘ De- 
lighted,’ ” returned Nan. 

I must really go now and leave you to your 
unpacking. We must try to see a lot of one 
another this year. Don’t forget the Euterpe on 
Friday night. Nan; the first meeting of the sea- 
son. I hope you’ve something to show for your 
summer’s work.” 

‘‘Not a great deal, but still something.” 

They parted and the Corner girls felt that 
the entering wedge had been driven, so that Jo 
might expect kinder usage than had been 
accorded her the year before. 

They were quite right in their hopes, for Jo, 
who had not been rushed for a “ frat,” began 


137 


Sophomores 

almost at once to have all sorts of attentions 
showered upon her, and at last was made a mem- 
ber of the dramatic club to which she had 
secretly longed to be invited. 

It was not long before all three girls had 
settled down into their new quarters and the 
routine of class work. But in the big dormitory 
they found themselves much more liable to what 
they called predatory invasion ’’ than when they 
were living in the village. The box in which 
they kept those stores which they often needed, 
seemed impossible of being made secure. It was 
an accepted fact that any girl who could find a 
means of foraging upon another must be tacitly 
permitted to do so, the only relief being found 
in inventing some way of preventing the boxes 
from being opened. Finally, between them, Jo 
and Nan did invent a way which was simple and 
effective. 

Mary Lee came in one day to find the other 
two on their knees busy in fastening an extra 
pair of long hinges on the outside of the box. 

What on earth are you all doing? ” she asked. 

Circumventing the predatory invaders,” re- 
sponded Jo. ‘‘I think we have struck it, Mary 
Lee. See here. You will perceive that we have 
these long hinges with flat ends at the front as 
well as at the back of the lid. We have fas- 
tened the front ones only to the top of the lid. 


138 The Four Corners at College 

but where they come down over the side they 
are not properly screwed, though they seem to 
be. We have holes made which go entirely 
through the box and we can slip a long screw 
through each of the holes in the hinge and it 
goes through the box, so the whole thing appears 
to be screwed down, and anyone trying to open 
cannot do it, though when we want to open the 
box all we have to do is to draw out the screws 
and there you are.’’ 

Mary Lee examined the contrivance carefully. 
‘‘ I think that’s mighty clever,” she said, ‘‘ and 
I defy anyone to discover how it is done, but 
we must keep it a dead secret.” 

“ We certainly intend to.” And it is safe to 
say that a dead secret it remained for the rest of 
their stay at college, not even the most ingenious 
raider learning the manipulation of the screws. 
Thus the Corners fared better than most, though 
the borrowers never ceased to make demands 
upon them. Especially did their supply of alcohol 
suffer, for no one ever thought of returning the 
bottle as full as it had gone forth, so finally Jo 
proposed that they keep a bottle with only a 
little in it, for she said, the more you send out 
the less is returned.” 

‘‘ I don’t mind their having it,” said Mary 
Lee, “ but I do mind our not having it when we 
need it badly.” 


Sophomores 139 

There were matters new and old to interest 
them. Flosshilde was dragged forth from her 
summer retreat, and was given a new coat of 
paint, Nan following the example of her fellow 
students, and doing the work herself. This 
year she determined to be one of the crew if 
possible. Jo, training for dramatics, gave 
frequent, if irregular, hours to field hockey. 
Mary Lee stuck to basket ball, and was hopeful 
of getting on the team. 

But, alas for Mary Lee, something occurred 
about mid-year which took from her all ambition 
for sports of any kind. Both she and Jo looked 
eagerly for letters from Virginia, these coming 
not less than once a week and sometimes oftener. 
One week Jo received hers, but the looked-for 
envelope addressed in a strong, decided hand- 
writing, failed to come for Mary Lee, and the 
girl seemed troubled and distrait all that day, 
and looked anxiously for the mail the next and 
the next. 

Nan watching her became aware that some- 
thing was wrong. ‘‘ What is the matter, Mary 
Lee ? ” she asked as she saw a distressed pucker 
marring her sister’s smooth forehead. “ Has 
anything gone wrong to-day?” 

Mary Lee leaning elbows on the window- 
sill, looked out for a moment without answer- 
ing. 


140 The Four Corners at College 

‘‘ Any trouble with your work ? You are not 
falling behind, Mary Lee, are you ? ” 

‘‘ No,” the answer came. 

‘‘ Then, what is it ? Can’t you tell me, old 
girl ? ” Nan went over and laid her arm affec- 
tionately across her sister’s shoulder. Down 
went Mary Lee’s head on the sill. Nan knelt 
on the floor beside her. “ Why, Mary Lee, is 
it anything so serious ? ” She felt that her sister 
was crying. 

‘‘ I haven’t heard from Phil,” said Mary Lee 
after a little more coaxing. 

Phil? ” Nan looked surprised. 

“ Yes, he always writes every two or three 
days. I didn’t mind the first few days, not so 
much, for I thought something might have pre- 
vented, but — it is nearly a week, and — he 
never did so before.” 

Nan was silent. It had never occurred to her 
that this young cousin who had been Mary Lee’s 
boon companion when they were children, who 
had come and gone as if he belonged in the 
old brown house, who had seemed like a brother 
always; it had never occurred to her that now 
when he was almost a man, there could have de- 
veloped any romantic attachment. To be sure 
the summer preceding the last Nan had not been 
on hand to watch the dawn of sentiment, and 
during the months of the past summer she had 


Sophomores 141 

taken it as a matter of course that the two 
should ride and drive, walk and fish together as 
they had done in all these years whenever the 
Corners had spent a summer at home. Phil in 
the light of a lover was a new revelation to her. 
Yet it must be or Mary Lee would not be so 
concerned. While these thoughts were going 
through Nan's head, Mary Lee's head still rested 
on her arms and her face was hidden. 

Nan faced the situation with cheerful advice. 
“ A week isn't long," she began. I wouldn’t 
worry yet. Very likely the letter has gone 
astray; it does happen that way sometimes. If 
anything were really wrong I think Dr. Paul 
would have written to one of us, or Aunt Sarah 
would." 

“ Jo heard from Dr. Paul to-day,” remarked 
Mary Lee, lifting wet eyes. 

I’ll go ask her if he mentioned Phil,” said 
Nan. ‘‘ Cheer up, honey. I’ll not stay long." 

She came back presently with the news that 
Dr. Paul had not mentioned any of the Lewis 
family. No news is good news,” she encour- 
aged Mary Lee by saying, and managed to make 
her believe that a letter must have gone astray, 
and that the next day would bring what she 
looked for. So Mary Lee wiped her eyes and 
began to take a more reasonable view of the 
matter, though in the night. Nan, waking up. 


142 The Four Corners at College 

heard stifled sobs, and she crept over to the bed 
where her sister lay. 

“ Can’t you sleep, honey ? ” she asked so- 
licitously. 

‘‘ No,” quavered Mary Lee. ‘‘ I keep think- 
ing, thinking, and such dreadful possibilities keep 
coming before me. I can’t help being apprehen- 
sive, Nan.” 

Things always seem worse in the middle of 
the night,” said Nan reassuringly. “ I’ll cuddle 
in here with you and perhaps then you can get 
to sleep.” 

But it was rather a pale and weary-eyed girl 
who confronted Nan the next morning with the 
declaration that she had not slept a wink. The 
mail was most anxiously looked for and it was 
Jo who drew Nan aside saying, ‘‘ I’ve had a letter 
from Dr. Paul, Nan. Phil Lewis is dangerously 
ill. It didn’t seem much at first, but the doctor 
says symptoms are very grave, and you know 
he is not an alarmist.” 

“What is it?” asked Nan. 

“ It has developed into typhoid, a bad case. 
Don’t alarm Mary Lee.” 

“I’ll try not, though perhaps she’d better 
know the worst.” She went to find her sister, 
who looked up eagerly. 

“ Has the mail come ? ” 

“ Yes, and Jo has had a letter.” 


Sophomores 143 

There is something wrong. I see it in your 
face. Oh, Nan, tell me, tell me. It is about 
Phil. He is ill — he is — 

“ Yes, he is ill, Mary Lee.^’ 

‘‘ Dangerously ? ” 

Nan was silent for a moment. “ They don’t 
know yet.” 

“ But I know, I know,” moaned Mary Lee. 
‘‘ What is it? ” 

Typhoid.” 

Mary Lee’s lips trembled. “If I could only 
go." 

“If you need to go you shall,” said Nan reso- 
lutely, “ and I will go with you, but I think we’d 
better wait a little to hear the next report, don’t 
you?” 

“ Perhaps. It will come to-morrow, don’t 
you believe it will ? ” 

“ I am sure it will. Dr. Paul is always so 
very thoughtful, and he will know how anxious 
we must be.” 

But it was early the next morning that a tele- 
gram, not a note, came, and it announced the 
death of the bright young fellow who, with high 
hopes had bidden them all farewell, and had 
waved to them as their train moved off. It was 
Nan who must break the news to her little sister, 
but it was Jo who helped to comfort the grief- 
stricken girl, for after all it was Jo who had 


144 The Four Corners at College 

been Mary Lee’s confidante though now Nan, 
too, learned of the affair which had suddenly 
blossomed from a childish comradeship into a 
warmer sentiment. 

‘‘ It has always been Phil, always,” sobbed 
Mary Lee. I keep thinking of all the things 
we used to do together, of the time, those years 
ago, when we were lost in the woods, and he was 
so brave and so dear, of how glad he was to have 
us back again after we had been so long away, 
of how bright and comforting he always was. I 
cannot believe it. Nan, I cannot. There has 
never been anyone else for me and there never 
will be.” 

I didn’t know. I never dreamed you felt 
so,” said her sister. 

“You were away that summer when we really 
knew that we cared in that way. We couldn’t be 
openly engaged, for Phil knew he must get 
through his studies and I must finish mine. He 
was going to tell his family next June when he 
would be twenty-one. He gave me a little ring 
just to keep till he could give me a real engage- 
ment ring. I shall always wear it — always 
— now.” She drew from her neck a slender 
chain on which the simple little ring hung, and 
slipped the small circlet upon her finger. 

She would fain have gone to Virginia, but 
Nan dissuaded her, fearing that the experience 


Sophomores 145 

would be too much for her, and that 
her memory of this beloved cousin, as she 
last saw him standing in the sunlight waving 
farewell, would be the happier one. In this de- 
cision Jo also concurred, and at last Mary Lee 
agreed that it would be better not to go. 

Later on she had the comfort of the last words 
he had ever written, and they were to her, for 
he had left an unfinished letter on his desk, and 
this was forwarded to her by his sister Polly 
whom they all loved. Young as Phil was, this 
romance of his was recognized as a reality by 
his family, to be treated with the dignity of a 
mature affection, as such things were by those 
to whom sentimental relations had come early. 

It was all very heart-breaking, and for a long 
time Mary Lee stole in or out of dormitory or 
hall like a pale ghost. It became whispered 
about that her lover had died, and in the romantic 
view of her college mates she was relegated to 
a place quite apart, for to their eyes she was a 
creature whose experiences proclaimed her scarce 
of common clay. 

But it was a weary and hopeless year for 
Mary Lee, and only the devotion of her friends 
and family kept it from being an unendurable 
one to spend at college. 

During the Easter holidays she and Nan went 
down to their old home, a sorrowful visit it 


146 The Four Corners at College 

was, but one that helped Mary Lee to bear her 
loss, for Phil’s mother, cousin Mag, his father, 
Colonel Lewis, his brother and sister all accepted 
the girl as one who, with them, had a chief right 
to mourn. Dr. Paul, too, was kindness itself, 
and went all the way back to college with them, 
though one might give him credit for something 
else than wholly disinterested motives in doing 
this. 




CHAPTER IX 


THE TURNING OF THE WORM 

In consequence of Mary Lee’s trouble the 
sisters had been drawn nearer together, and a 
new gentleness was visible in Mary Lee’s 
manner. Hitherto she had always been a little 
too self-centered and exacting, a little too critical 
and selfish, but grief is a great developer of 
character and its effect on Mary Lee was visible 
in a new tenderness toward her sisters, and a 
self-forgetfulness in matters which once were 
very important to her. She threw herself with 
greater diligence into her college work, and stood 
well. 

This year it was Nan’s song which took the 
prize, and Jo won laurels in the dramatic club. 
She had made her way by sheer pluck and good- 
will, so that now she was a general favorite, and 
no one was more in demand for any entertainment 
that might be going on. The story of the furs 
had been made clear to every one, so far as it was 
possible, and those wha were kindly disposed put 
forth an extra effort to make amends for un- 
founded suspicions, while those who, in the be- 


150 The Four Corners at College 

ginning believed ill reports, were eventually won 
over by Jo’s popularity. 

Many were the little suppers at the Inn. Fre- 
quent were the excursions into town when Jo 
was the life of the party, not always one strictly 
of college girls, for brothers, cousins, friends 
and relations from Harvard or Yale often were 
on hand, and the circle of acquaintances increased 
for all three of the girls. 

Many looked forward to Yale Prom., but it 
never entered Jo’s head that she might be one 
of those favored with an invitation, for it was 
an unwritten law that each man was to invite the 
prettiest girl of his acquaintance, and Jo was very 
humble about her personal appearance. 

However, she came into the Corners’ room 
one day greatly excited. “ Girls,” she cried, 
“what do you think? I am invited to the Yale 
Prom. Oh, don’t I wish I could go ! ” 

“Why can’t you?” asked Mary Lee. 

“ For obvious reasons, which you will find 
emphasized, if you will kindly look over my 
wardrobe.” 

“ Oh, nonsense, if that’s all. You know we’ll 
be glad to supply deficiencies.” 

“Why shouldn’t you go?” put in Nan. 
“ We’ll help you out. All the girls do that for 
one another, as you well know, so it is no time 
to be proud.” 


The Turning of the Worm 151 

“ Who asked you, Jo? ” said Mary Lee, laying 
her hand on Jo’s round arm. 

‘‘John Townsend. It is all right but for the 
clothes, chaperon provided, and all that. There 
will be every sort of festivity you can imagine. 
I wish you girls were going.” 

“ We’ve both had invitations, but I shall de- 
cline,” returned Mary Lee. “ There is no reason 
why Nan shouldn’t go. I wish she would. She 
declares she will not. Do go. Nan.” 

“Do, please, Nan. Who invited you?” 

“Rita’s cousin, Rob Powell.” 

“ Do try to persuade her,” Mary Lee con- 
tinued. “ You two could have such a jolly time, 
and I’d love to hear about it, though I don’t care 
to be in it.” 

“ Your presence would add a lot to the oc- 
casion, Nan,” said Jo cajolingly. 

But Nan shook her head. “ Maybe next year, 
if I am invited. Lots of the girls are going; 
you will not be lonely, Jo.” 

“ I know a number are going. Whom have 
you heard of?” 

“ Lil Markham for one.” 

“ Of course. She is too dashing a beauty to 
be left out. Anyone else? ” 

“ Emily Taylor and Connie Weber.” 

“ What about Rita Converse ? She has an- 
other cousin at Yale, hasn’t she? ” 


1^2 The Four Corners at College 

“ Yes, but I haven’t heard her mention going 
to the Prom.” 

‘‘Would you go if she did, Nan? ” 

“ I don’t suppose that would make any dif- 
ference in my plans.” 

“ Tell me something about Robert Powell.” 

“ He is quite a bright fellow. He was one of 
the party at the Inn when we dined there last 
week, and I have met him several times.” 

“ You’d better go. Nan. You don’t know 
what a Prom, may bring forth.” 

Nan smiled. “ You can’t beguile me in that 
way.” 

“ Well, say you will think about it. Give your- 
self a little leeway before you decline abso- 
lutely.” 

“ Yes, please do. Nan,” Mary Lee put in her 
plea. “ I’d really like to hear of your experi- 
ences ; it would do me good to know about some- 
thing outside of our own college.” 

“ I’ll think about it,” said Nan thus pressed, 
and later on she allowed herself to be persuaded. 

Mary Lee insisted upon giving Jo the privilege 
of selecting from her belongings anything she 
might choose for the important occasion, frocks, 
stockings and slippers, ribbons, jewelry, hats, any- 
thing and everything, if Jo wanted it. They 
were about the same size, and could easily wear 
each other’s clothes. Jo was not really a beauty. 


The Turning of the Worm 153 

but was so piquant and bright as to be more at- 
tractive than many a girl with more regular fea- 
tures, and in Mary Lee’s best clothes made a 
charming little figure. 

Mary Lee promised not to mope during the 
absence of the two, but to allow herself plenty 
of company, and to accept any invitation in 
reason. In due time her sister and Jo set out 
for their week of frolic, and if Mary Lee was 
rather lonely, she struggled to carry out her 
promise, and in this was helped by the frequent 
presence of the twins who came to see her daily 
and seemed to feel the responsibility of compen- 
sating for the absence of Nan and Jo. They 
generally brought offerings of some kind, a bag 
of cakes, well sampled before it was presented, 
a box of candy similarly pilfered, or ice-cream 
the worse for having been carried some distance. 
At other times they would bring flowers or a 
book, and so well did they time their ministra- 
tions that Mary Lee seldom had leisure to get 
in the dumps as Jack expressed it. 

Jean, however, was a true little comforter, for 
she always seemed to know exactly what to say 
to Mary Lee at the moment when she needed 
sympathy. These two understood each other, 
as was the case with Nan and Jack. 

Jean arrived one Friday afternoon and said, 
‘‘ Mary Lee, Jack has about a thousand plans 


1^4 The Four Corners at College 

for to-morrow, but I’m not in any that I care 
for, and so I wish you’d do something.” 

“ And what do you wish I would do? ” asked 
Mary Lee. 

“ Go somewhere.’’ 

‘‘ Oh, Jean — ” 

“ I don’t mean anything like a matinee,” Jean 
interrupted, “ but wouldn’t it be nice to see 
Daniella and Hermy?” 

‘‘ Why — yes, it would.” 

‘‘ Then couldn’t we go to the Wadsworth 
school to-morrow and see them all? If you’ll 
say you can go I will call up and tell them we 
are coming, so they will be sure not to go into 
town or anywhere. Would you mind, Mary 
Lee? It would seem like old times, and I think 
it would be a nice little change.” 

Mary Lee considered the matter for a few 
minutes. “ I believe I would like it,” she de- 
cided after due deliberation. 

Oh, good ! Miss Barnes has sent word time 
after time that she would love to have us come 
some Saturday, and Daniella begged us at 
Christmas ; so did Hermione. What time can we 
start, Mary Lee ? ” 

“ We may as well go pretty early. I’ll meet 
you at the station, then you won’t have to come 
all the way here. We might start about eleven 
so as to get there before dinner, Look up the 


The Turning of the Worm 155 

trains, Jean, and we will see what is the best 
we can do. There is a time-table over there on 
my desk.’’ 

Jean obeyed and presently announced when 
they could leave. Then, as Mary Lee said she 
must return to her books, Jean thought she would 
hurry back or Jack would be hunting her up. 
“ And I don’t want Jack to know,” she remarked. 

“ Why not ? ” asked Mary Lee. 

Oh, just because.” And Mary Lee under- 
stood that there had been some little tiff between 
the two, so she asked no more questions. 

The start for the Wadsworth school was made 
promptly the next morning, Jean giving the in- 
formation that she had called up her friends and 
that both Daniella and Hermione would be at 
the station to meet them. And there they were. 
Shy, mousey little Hermione not quite so shy, 
and Daniella blossomed into a young lady well 
dressed, lovely and, though never talkative, at 
least able to hold her own when necessary. 

It seemed odd to be again in the little town 
which had grown to be so familiar during that 
year when the Corners were at the Wadsworth 
school, and it was stranger still to enter the doors 
of the school itself after all this time. Now the 
little girls were the big ones, and Daniella was 
the eldest of all, though she had made her way 
with surprising rapidity, and would be graduated 


156 The Four Corners at College 

about the time Nan and Mary Lee should leave 
college. 

Miss Barnes met them cordially and they were 
taken into the sitting-room which had changed 
very little since those early days. The same 
pictures, the same furniture, the same phono- 
graph; but the curtains and carpet were new, 
Jean observed. Daniella still occupied the room 
in which she felt so much at home that she de- 
clared she would hate to leave it when the time 
came. 

‘‘ And when the time comes, what shall you do, 
Daniella ? asked Mary Lee. “ Shall you go to 
Texas to keep house for Mr. Scott?’’ 

Daniella looked a little troubled and the color 
came into her face as she said, I don’t know. 
I shall do as my father says,” but she gave a 
little sigh and began to talk about Nan and Jo. 

Jean had danced off with Hermione to in- 
spect some of their old haunts while Daniella 
and Mary Lee chatted behind the closed door 
of the former’s room. 

It seems as if there were ghosts everywhere,” 
sighed Mary Lee. “ Think of all those who were 
here when we first came, and of all that has 
happened since then.” The tears came to her 
eyes. Phil was with her in that long ago when 
they first discovered little Daniella Boggs living 
in a lonely cabin upon the mountain side. 


The Turning of the Worm 157 

Daniella laid a gentle hand on her friend’s. 

I know/’ she said, ‘‘ I know, but Mary Lee, 
isn’t it beautiful that you will always have him 
right there? Nothing can happen to take him 
any further away. Nothing wicked or cruel. 
That’s the way I think about my mother; she is 
always right there, loving me.” 

Mary Lee wiped her tearful eyes. “ That is 
true, Daniella. I am glad you said that. He 
is always there waiting for me, always loving 
me. Always young and happy. How do I 
know what might have happened to separate us 
on earth? Now nothing can; he is always my 
Phil. Do you remember that day when we came 
to look for his watch and found you, too ? ” 

“Shall I ever forget it?” returned Daniella. 
Then they fell to talking of half-forgotten things 
till Jean and Hermione came to say that dinner 
was ready. How familiar that Saturday boiled 
dinner seemed, though there were strange faces 
around the board. But there was Mrs. Chan- 
ning, “ Blue China ” as they used to call her 
among themselves, and she had changed but 
little; there, too, was Miss Barnes, sweeter and 
gentler as experience gave her broader knowl- 
edge of and broader charity for human weak- 
nesses. Miss Wyllys and Miss Wheeler were no 
longer there, being established in homes of their 
own. Miss Lovejoy had gone to the city, but 


158 The Four Corners at College 

Miss Ames was present and greeted the girls 
cordially. 

I always enjoy having my old girls come 
back again/' said Miss Barnes. ‘‘ You are go- 
ing to stay over night, I hope, for I have asked 
some of your former friends to come over to 
meet you." This being so, the visitors yielded, 
and after a while their one-time schoolmates be- 
gan to arrive. 

Effie Glenn was at Smith, Charlotte Loring at 
Barnard, but Abby Russell and Lizzie Trask had 
been summoned ; they had not entered college but 
now lived in Boston and were eager to respond 
to the call for a reunion. Then some of the 
day-scholars dropped in and there was lively 
chatter over their cups of tea, gossip of course, 
and some romances to be discussed. 

“ It certainly is good to see you again," said 
Abby heartily, ‘‘ and I wish you'd come and spend 
a week-end with me, Mary Lee; you and Nan 
might come at any time when you are so near. 
I am not a gay society lady but I think we could 
have a nice cozy time talking over old experi- 
ences. How Jean has grown; she will be a 
woman before you know it ! " 

“ Yes, but you should see Jack," Mary Lee 
told her. She is taller than I am. She grows 
more like Nan, we all think." 

“And Nan has gone to Yale Prom. What 


The Turning of the Worm 159 

luck. Jo, too? Jo has fallen on her feet from 
all I can hear, and I am glad of it. Did you 
know Lizzie is engaged? Oh, Danny told you, 
of course. What do you hear from Charley? 
We never see anything of her these days. 
Frances? Oh, my dear, didn’t you know that 
she married last year ? No, not particularly well, 
but — oh, there is no use in raking up old griev- 
ances, is there? None of us ever did care very 
much for Frank. Now tell me something of 
college life and what you are doing.” 

So the talk went on, then Lizzie came up, and 
the three had a great “ confab,” as they called 
it. Mary Lee was quite taken out of herself 
and decided that it was a wise little Jean who 
had proposed the visit at such a time. 

They saw Dr. and Mrs. Foster after church 
the next day, who would fain have had the girls 
come home with them to dinner and to see the 
baby. Though they could not accept the invi- 
tation to dinner, they did stop long enough to 
be shown the little fellow of whom his parents 
were so proud. Miss Wheeler, as a teacher at 
the Wadsworth school, the girls had not been 
very fond of in the beginning, but marriage had 
brought about a great change in the once rather 
forbidding young woman, and her tenderness to- 
ward her little boy was quite a revelation to 
Mary Lee and Jean. 


i6o The Four Corners at College 

“ The same old Sunday dinner,” remarked 
Jean as they took their places in the train. I 
could almost believe myself a little girl again, 
Mary Lee.” 

‘‘ And what are you, pray? ” 

“A big girl,” responded Jean promptly, and 
Mary Lee smiled. ‘‘ I don’t say creer and crite 
and creen any more, except when I get excited 
and my tongue gets twisted,” said Jean rem- 
iniscently. ‘‘ In two years I’ll be a Fresh- 
man, so I am getting really quite grown up. 
Are you glad you went, Mary Lee ? ” 

“ Very glad. I enjoyed it immensely. Dan- 
iella is such a dear. Everyone was so kind and 
cordial and it was nice to learn all about the 
old girls and what they are doing. Yes, I am 
very glad, Jean.” 

“ Won’t Jack be surprised! ” said Jean with a 
little laugh of satisfaction. 

‘‘ Why, didn’t she know ? ” 

She didn’t know where we were going. I 
left a note for her to say I was going somewhere 
with you, and she needn’t be worried if we 
stayed over night. I told Miss Lane, of course, 
and she said it would be all right as long as 
I would be with you. Maybe Jack will guess, 
and I reckon she will be mad as hops because 
we didn’t take her, too. I told her I would pay 
her back and I did.” 


The Turning of the Worm i6i 

For what? Has she been doing anything in 
particular? ’’ 

“ She went off to a matinee with Barbara last 
week, and they didn’t tell me till it was too late 
for me to get ready. I think it was very mean.” 

Perhaps they didn’t do it on purpose,” Mary 
Lee suggested. 

“ Yes, they did. Jack wanted Barbara all to 
herself; I just know she did, for she as much 
as said so.” 

“ It is a pity you both admire Barbara so 
much,” said Mary Lee. “ Why don’t you get 
another chum ? ” 

“Why doesn’t Jack? I’ve just as much right 
to Barbara as she has. I wish Hermy came to 
our school; then I could take her, but she is 
going to the Wadsworth till she is graduated, 
and she isn’t going to college, so I have to have 
Barbara. I’m afraid, though,” after a little 
pause, “ that she likes Jack the best.” 

“ Jack is a very popular young person,” re- 
marked Mary Lee, “ but you must try not to be 
envious of her; you should rather be proud of 
it, for she is your very own twin, you know.” 

“ Ye-es,” responded Jean doubtfully. She 
could not quite forgive Jack for the slight of 
the previous Saturday. To be deserted by Jack 
and Barbara both was a little too much. Jean 
had long followed Jack’s lead, but she was be- 


i 62 The Four Corners at College 

ginning to assert herself and to carry out her own 
plans and inventions. 

When Jean returned, Jack expressed all the in- 
dignation her twin had looked for, but it must 
be said that from that day she had more respect 
for Jean as it dawned upon her that tame sub- 
mission was no longer to be expected from this 
young person. The worm has turned,’' re- 
marked Jean with dignity when Jack began to 
remonstrate, and Jack for once, was silenced. 




CHAPTER X 


YALE PROM. 

It was a bevy of unusually pretty girls 
that fluttered about under the elms of New 
Haven’s old college, though of course there were 
such diversities of opinion in the matter of beauty 
that it gave infinite variety to the assemblage, 
and many were the comments made by the 
critical observers of the Freshman and Sopho- 
more classes. Nan and Jo looked out inter- 
estedly from their windows at the groups of 
passers-by. 

‘^Doesn’t it look jolly?” said Jo. ‘‘Every 
girl is diked out fit to kill and the boys are so 
dapper and fine. There goes Connie Weber. 
She has one of Lou Forber’s hats on. I recog- 
nize the little perky bow. I suppose persons will 
be making like remarks about me : ‘ There goes 

Jo Keyes with Mary Lee Corner’s hat on.’ ” 

“ I shouldn’t care,” responded Nan. “ There 
are plenty more in the same box. Let me see, 
what is the next thing on the programme?” 

“ Tea at John Townsend’s rooms.” 

“ Oh, yes, and a dance to-night. We’ll be 


i66 The Four Corners at College 

worn to a frazzle, Jo, by the time we are ready 
to leave/' 

“ So will the others, therefore we needn’t 
bother. Look, Nan, there goes Olive Yates 
with Rita Converse’s other cousin. Do you sup- 
pose he invited her instead of Rita? I don’t 
think she is a bit better looking.” 

“ By the ‘ other cousin,’ I suppose you mean 
Dave Ferguson.” 

‘‘ Yes, of course. What would your cavalier 
be doing gallanting around a girl out of our 
party. I’d like to know.” 

Nan laughed. “ He didn’t invite her, I happen 
to know, though I forget the name of the girl 
he did invite. Rob Powell told me who it was. 
By the way, Jo, don’t let me forget that I prom- 
ised to take a walk with Rob to-morrow after- 
noon.” 

Jo laughed. Are you liable to forget? ” 

Oh, I don’t know. When there is so much 
going on I might.” 

‘‘ That shows that your interest is not so very 
deep.” 

Whoever said it was? Of course I like Rob 
or I wouldn’t have been willing to accept his 
invitation.” 

He is a mighty bright fellow, and the girls 
all think he is fine.” 

One meets a lot of bright men among these 


Yale Prom. 


167 

college boys, though they have a different kind 
of brightness from those down home, it seems 
to me. More sparkling, a kind of effervescent 
cleverness. One might use this comparison and 
say that their luminosity is like that of an electric 
light compared to, a good steady satisfactory 
lamp.’’ 

I see clearly. Nan, that you are bound to 
marry no one but a Virginian.” 

“ So are you,” retorted Nan ; and succeeded 
in heading Jo off from continuing that subject. 

The tea passed off as teas should, with mirth 
and jollity. Jo saw to it that the walk was not 
overlooked by Nan, and herself paraded two at- 
tending cavaliers at the same time. She had 
noised it abroad that Nan had taken the prize 
offered by the Euterpe for the best song, and in 
consequence Nan was made much of by some of 
the members of the Glee Club who begged her 
to contribute a song for one of their special 
occasions. The boys began to dub her Miss 
Meistersinger from this out and serenaded her 
with Wagner’s Preislied ” one night. 

One entertainment followed another till the 
night of the Junior Prom, when the revels 
reached their greatest height. For this each girl 
must look her loveliest, and therefore long and 
careful attention was given to dressing for the 
occasion. Every hair must be just so, and each 


i68 The Four Corners at College 

costume received critical supervision from the 
chaperons. Nan had chosen to wear white while 
Jo appeared in Mary Lee’s most fetching blue 
evening gown. Not a necklace, bracelet or pin 
but was tried and re-tried till at last the proper 
combinations were reached, and the girls were 
ready to take their places in the big hall where 
there would be no pause in music or dancing, 
for the two bands would alternate the night 
long. 

The circle of boxes was already well filled 
when the two girls entered with their chaperon, 
and from above looked down upon the laugh- 
ing faces of the Freshmen and Sophomores who 
were bent upon mirth and mischief this night of 
nights. As the hours wore on the fun increased 
and Jo declared it was almost more fun to be 
in the boxes than to be among the dancers. 

‘‘ Nan, do look at that,” she cried as a lobster 
was carefully lowered to a Junior in the next 
box. 

John Townsend laughed. “ Will Fowler has 
taken Mat Ward’s girl from him, hence the mild 
suggestion. Look out. Miss Nan, there is some- 
thing coming your way.” 

A neat little billet-doux dropped into Nan’s 
lap. She opened it and read : 

“I sat me down in thought profound, 

This maxim wise I drew, 








^',?i-'V 




fM '' 


iRtfv ' 

iHL V'r" 


' ^ 'x^@HL 


At the Yale Prom 







Yale Prom. 


169 


^Tis easier far to like a girl 
Than make a girl like you.’^ 

Nan looked up to see a Sophomore with his 
handkerchief to his eyes and she recognized a 
member of the Glee Club whom she had met the 
night before at a dance, and for whom she had 
no room on her programme. He had heard of 
her musical triumph and was most anxious to 
offer her all sorts of attentions, and to make 
engagements, none of which were possible in the 
rush of affairs ; in consequence came the reproach- 
ful lines and the pretended tears. 

A moment later one of Jo’s roses was neatly 
hooked out of her bouquet and was born aloft 
as a trophy, but in exchange she received a box 
of candies marked “ Sweets to the sweet.” 

True, if not very original,” remarked John 
Townsend on whom the girls declared Jo ‘‘ had 
a case.” 

Mrs. Larrabee, the married sister of Robert 
Powell, made a charming chaperon, and both girls 
felt that she was a great addition to their party. 
A chaperon, to be strictly desirable, must add 
good looks to youth on this occasion, and Mrs. 
Larrabee was a very pretty woman. As Rita 
Converse’s cousin, Nan felt that her chaperon was 
not altogether a stranger as she had heard Rita, 
as well as Robert, speak frequently of her, of 
her charming children and her pretty home just 


170 The Four Corners at College 

out of New York. She had, too, a cottage 
upon the little island where Rita passed her 
summers, and her account of it was so fasci- 
nating as to make Nan long to spend a summer 
there. 

We could have a jolly time,” Mrs. Larrabee 
told her. Do come. There are a number of 
musical people there who would add to the 
charm, I am sure, and there is no end to the 
lovely places to which one can sail. Rob has 
a motor-boat and when we don't sail we can go 
in that.” 

Nan had heard of the place before, but Mrs. 
Larrabee was even more enthusiastic than Rita 
who still retained her love of the old world. 
“ I had to leave my babies to come,” Mrs. Lar- 
rabee said, ‘‘ but I couldn’t leave Robin in the 
lurch, for he is the baby of our family and it 
would never do for his eldest sister to fail him 
at a time like this. You and Rita are such 
friends that I suppose you are very sorry that this 
is her last year.” 

I shall miss her beyond words,” said Nan. 

We have so much in common, although she is 
in an upper class. I don’t like to think of col- 
lege next year without her.” 

All the more reason that you should come 
to our island,” said Mrs. Larrabee. 

‘‘ W e shall have to think about it,” replied 


Yale Prom. 


171 

Nan. But just then she was claimed for a dance 
and off she went. 

She passed Lillian Markham more than once. 
“I didn’t know were here,” was Lillian’s 
first greeting. 

‘‘Jo Keyes and I are both here,” answered 
Nan, glad to be able to say as much, for Lillian, 
like many another in such a case, could not for- 
give Jo for not having proved blameworthy. 
Miss Markham, of course was surrounded by ad- 
mirers, but Jo had not wasted her time and could 
show an equal array, attracted by her bright 
sallies and amusing remarks. She was in her ele- 
ment, and naturally was at her best. She did 
not miss a dance, though she sat out the greater 
part of some, as it was beyond human endurance 
to dance the entire night through. 

This week, which had thrown Nan largely 
upon the society of Robert Powell, indubitably 
must give her a more intimate acquaintance with 
this cousin of Rita’s, and it is safe to say that 
after the first she was in no danger of for- 
getting an engagement with him. He was 
spoken of as a brilliant young fellow who would 
one day be heard of, and Nan discovered after a 
while that she was the object of more than one 
girl’s jealousy, and especially of Lillian Mark- 
ham’s. Lillian had been piqued at Nan’s receiv- 
ing the prize for her song, as it was her am- 


172 The Four Corners at College 

bition to be first in every particular, therefore 
the breach, which was already begun, widened 
between them. She had met Robert Powell in 
her Freshman year, and had received some at- 
tention from him; but, as he told his sister, 
“ Rita put him wise,” and he had gradually 
dropped out of her circle. For this she did not 
forgive him, and now that Nan had not only 
carried off the prize from the Euterpe Club, but 
was Robert’s special guest in a party which his 
sister chaperoned, she struck Nan from her books 
and scarce spoke to her when they met. More- 
over, she contrived in the many ways a pretty 
and exacting girl can, to prevent her own special 
men friends from meeting either Jo or Nan, and 
made more than one criticism that might weigh 
against them. 

All this came under Robert Powell’s notice, 
and, as is often true, it had the opposite effect 
from that Lillian could have wished, for it made 
him redouble his attentions to Nan and also 
caused him to make the effort to present the most 
desirable of his friends to both girls. In con- 
sequence they were the innocent recipients of 
favors not often given. 

Nan and Robert were sitting out a dance when 
he said, I heard all about that first song of 
yours. Miss Nan. You should have taken the 
prize last year as well as this.” 


Yale Prom. 


173 

‘^You heard about it? Who told you?” 
Nan looked surprised. 

‘‘Rita; and I believe I have had a hint of it 
from another direction. I used to see more of 
Miss Markham and her satellites than I do now- 
adays. Rita told me about it only the other day 
and since then it has come to me that Miss Bron- 
son made rather a peculiar remark on the sub- 
ject of the competition. We were all talking 
about it and she said ; ‘ Connie Weber has seen 

to it that Lil takes the prize.' ” 

“Connie Weber?” 

“ Yes, she is one of Miss Markham's most 
ardent admirers, as you probably know.” 

Nan nodded, then she said musingly, “ I never 
suspected her. We were never very good 
friends, for I think she resented my audacity. 
That I, a Freshman, should dare to compete 
with a Junior, and that Junior Lillian, was 
enough to rouse all her resentment. I felt it 
intuitively, though I never thought she would do 
a dishonorable thing.” 

“ She might not for any other than the cause 
of Miss Markham, but I strongly suspect it now, 
and I told Rita so the other day.” 

“ What did she say ? ” 

“ She put on her thinking cap, but could not 
remember that Miss Connie had been given ac- 
cess to the manuscripts except in the presence 


1.74 The Four Corners at College 

of the committee. She was one of the number, 
and they examined them in a body, though Rita 
thinks it would not have been impossible to ab- 
stract some special composition before the ex- 
amination took place.” 

Nan sat thoughtfully looking off at the dancers. 
Then a little flush came to her face. All at once 
she remembered something to which she had not 
attached any importance at the time, but she 
only said, Oh, well, it is all over now, and 
I have ceased to trouble myself about it. So 
long as I took the prize this year it ought to 
satisfy my greed for fame.” 

Robert Powell was watching her. ‘‘ Into 
whose hands did you give the manuscript ? ” 

“ Never mind,” replied Nan shaking her head. 
‘‘ Do you ask from mere curiosity or as an evi- 
dence of a legal mind ? ” 

“ It is from a desire to see fair play.” 

“ But the play is all over and done with. Let’s 
talk about something else.” 

Yet, at the same time she remembered dis- 
tinctly that it was Connie Weber to whom she 
had handed her paper. She had met her at the 
door of the room where the manuscripts were to 
be deposited in a certain box. Connie had taken 
the paper, and, so far as Nan could see, had 
dropped it in the box, then she had come out, 
locked the door and had borne off the key. Per- 


Yale Prom. 


175 


haps it was not put in the box at that time, but 
was secreted, examined, altered and finally de- 
posited with the others. All the manuscripts 
were of uniform size and were placed in special 
envelopes prepared for them, so there might be no 
identification at the time. Probably Connie was 
well acquainted with the powers of such girls 
as might offer their original work, all except 
Nan, and she knew that Lillian had no rival 
among the others, but she could not count on Nan, 
who was as yet an unknown quantity. 

‘‘ I believe you are convinced,” said Robert still 
keeping to the subject, and it strikes me that 
it is very magnanimous of you not to say so. 
I haven’t a doubt that you know something which 
corroborates my suspicions. In your place Pm 
afraid I should follow up the matter from the 
mere love of getting the best of the other fel- 
low.” 

Nan smiled thoughtfully. “ I think I have the 
best of it,” she replied. 

Robert made no comment, but, be it said, that 
if anything were required to make him more 
loyal to her standard it was her simple little re- 
mark. 

‘‘ By Jinks,” he said to his sister later on, that 
Nan Corner is good stuff. I tell you, Hetty, you 
don’t meet such high-minded girls every day. 
Rita is daffy over her, and I really asked Miss 


176 The Four Corners at College 

Nan to the Prom, more to please Rita than for 
any other reason, but I’m blest if I’m not tickled 
to death to think that I’m such a lucky dog as 
to have this chance of knowing her better, and 
she’s a peach of a girl all right.” 

It seems to me that Rita is not the only one 
who is daffy,” replied his sister laughing. 

“ That’s all right. I say she is a peach, a 
regular pippin, the sort a man wants to take his 
troubles to, and she’s a good-looker, too.” 

I thought Miss Markham was your ideal of 
beauty.” 

Bah ! ” replied Robert. ‘‘ IVe cut all that 
out. I was only a poor Fresh, when I first met 
her, but now I’ve cut my wisdom teeth and 
I know a good thing when I see it. Nan Cor- 
ner’s the stuff, you hear me ? ” 

At last the gray dawn ended the long night 
of dance and delight, and the tired revelers, in 
little groups, departed from the great hall where 
in the silence were left only the tokens of what 
had been there. A rosebud here, a ribbon there, 
a scrap of lace, a shining spangle, were all that 
spoke of the presence of that merry company on 
which the lights had shone an hour before. 

Nan and Jo were too tired to chatter long 
after they reached their room, and they dropped 
into bed well satisfied to reach the point where 
rest was assured. The next day they returned 


Yale Prom. 


177 


to Bettersley, and if Mary Lee was not enter- 
tained by the account of all that had happened 
at Yale Prom, it was not Jo's fault, nor Nan’s 
either, for that matter, for each offered a feast 
of tales sentimental or humorous with a little 
spice of gossip added to give savor. 



s 




CHAPTER XI 


A COUNTRY RIDE 

The spring days brought the round of cele- 
brations which had seemed such novelties the year 
before. In many of these Nan took part, though 
Mary Lee in few, except in those out-door sports 
she had always loved. Dances she refused to at- 
tend, but she was as keen as anyone in trying to 
learn where the Juniors meant to burn their fo- 
rensics, and was ready on May Day to be a 
child again. Once in a while she was lured off to 
a matinee, and both she and Nan spent a week- 
end with Abby Russell. Nan and Jo, however, 
had much on hand. They were on several com- 
mittees and seemed to have no end of business 
to transact on all occasions. Frequently they 
would have to make excursions to the city be- 
cause of costumes for some play or because of 
some other matter which demanded judgment. 
At such times Mary Lee rarely accompanied 
them, though she was gradually regaining a 
more cheerful composure and was interested in 
many things which concerned her class. Jo was 
her chief chum, but Jo was such a person of 


182 The Four Corners at College 

affairs these days that often Mary Lee must 
choose some other companion for a row on the 
lake or a walk through the woods. The out- 
door breakfasts were begun again, though it is 
safe to say that Jo was not allowed a prominent 
part in making them ready. She had learned to 
sew with some degree of neatness and could 
make an excellent pot of tea, but she was not yet 
to be entrusted with eggs, Mary Lee declared. 

“ By the time you’re leaving college you may 
be,” she said, but it will take at least two years 
to train you to manage a chafing dish, Jo Keyes. 
You either run the alcohol all over everything, 
or you forget to put water in the under pan, or 
to take it off altogether, or something untoward 
like that. No, Josephine, you are as yet too in- 
exact to be entrusted with such important mat- 
ters.” 

Jo laughed and said she was going to get a 
chafing dish of her own and practice in the se- 
clusion of her own room behind locked doors. 

“ And burn yourself up before we can get 
there ! ” Mary Lee exclaimed. 

Jo looked solemn and was obliged to confess 
that such a catastrophe might be possible, so at 
last she announced that she would wait till she 
had left college before she tried experiments, but 
that then she meant to devote herself to the 
culinary arts, at which Nan laughed wickedly 


A Country Ride 183 

and Jo with flaming face gave her a good shak- 
ing. 

So the days went by till June was close at 
hand, and because Nan and Jo were absorbed 
in rehearsals and in their practice for various 
contests, Mary Lee did not see very much of 
them, but in this time the twins did not desert 
her, and made almost daily calls to hear of what 
was going on in this wonderful college world in 
which they were deeply interested, for, would 
they not enter there some day ? 

One Saturday Jean appeared. “ Get your 
hat,” she said. “ You are going with us. Now 
don’t say you can’t, Mary Lee. We have set 
our hearts on it.” 

Going where ? ” 

‘‘ Why, Jack’s down with the carriage. She 
has hired it for the whole day, and we are going 
ofif to a place we heard of in the country where 
we can get a fine dinner. You must go, Mary 
Lee.” 

“ Who is going to drive ? ” 

‘‘Jack says she will unless you’d like to. We 
could take turns. Would you like to ask any 
of your friends? We thought it would be sort 
of nice and homey to go by ourselves; just us 
three, but we’ll do any way you like.” 

“ I’d much rather we’d go alone, and I think 
it is a lovely plan. Does Jack know the way? ” 


184 The Four Corners at College 

‘‘ I think so. Anyhow we know the name of 
the place and we can inquire as we go. Shall 
I tell Jack you’re coming? ” 

‘‘ Yes, I will be right down.” 

Jean started out, then came running back. “ I 
forgot that Jack said to take a book if you liked, 
for we might want to stop somewhere on the 
way back.” 

Mary Lee tucked a small book in the handbag 
she carried, and presently joined her sisters. 
She was hardly yet used to the fact that they 
were no longer irresponsible children and that 
they were quite capable of planning things for 
themselves. Jack had entirely outstripped Jean 
in height, and looked sufficiently able to conduct 
the expedition as she sat there flicking flies from 
the back of the horse. 

Well Jack, this is a great lark,” declared 
Mary Lee, settling herself in the back seat. 
“ Do you know just where you are going? ” 

‘‘ Yes, to Cloverdale. It is a little village and 
there is a sort of tea-room there where the auto- 
mobiles stop and where, they say, you can get 
a very good dinner for fifty cents. One of the 
girls told me about it.” 

‘‘ Sounds alluring, and it is a perfect day for 
it. I think it is a happy thought to go off this 
way by ourselves; it will be very restful.” 

They jogged along comfortably for some time 


A Country Ride 185 

until they came to a cross road where Jack stopped 
to take her bearings. She espied a signpost 
which set her right, but further along, the way 
became more puzzling, and more than once they 
turned off only to learn by inquiring that they 
must retrace their route. 

At last Cloverdale was reached, a sleepy, pretty 
little village cuddled down at the foot of the hills. 
Close to a winding stream they found the place 
they were in search of, an old-fashioned house 
by the wayside. A small sign hanging on one of 
the posts of the porch told them that this was 
Cloverdale Inn, that meals were furnished to 
automobile parties and others, and that afternoon 
tea might be obtained. A man in his shirt 
sleeves came out and led away the horse, then a 
woman, an elderly bright-eyed wiry person, ap- 
peared to usher them into a neat parlor over- 
loaded with homemade decorations such as mats, 
tidies, cardboard trifles of many kinds, small 
silken banners, lamp-shades and the like. To 
these were added chromos and family photo- 
graphs, sofa pillows and tinseled vases, so the 
small room was bereft of any modicum of com- 
fort it might have possessed. The dining-room 
was better. Vases of flowers stood on the tables, 
the linen, though coarse, was clean, and the meal 
set forth for them was all that they could ask. 
The fresh fish was particularly good and the 


i86 The Four Corners at College 

varieties of pies were so numerous that each girl 
might have selected differently twice over. 

They were waited on by the elderly woman 
who chattered all the time, questioning fre- 
quently and commenting volubly upon the enter- 
prise which she, herself, was interested in. 
‘‘ My daughter and her husband, they run it,” 
she told her guests. You saw him when you 
came in. Some folks was tellin’ her about them 
tea places in England and she took the notion 
that she might try somethin’ of the kind. Me 
and her is good cooks. Ain’t them fish all 
right? Jest wait a minute and I’ll take your 
dirty plates.” 

Dirty plates,” murmured Mary Lee as the 
woman bustled off, while the twins suppressed 
their laughter. 

“ My name’s Goodwin. I’m her mother,” 
came the next information. He’s a Pitkin. 
As I was a-sayin’ she thought she’d try to run 
it and see what she could make. There’s con- 
siderable many automobiles goes by. There, 
lemme git you some fresh water. We’ve got 
a real good well; they say it’s a livin’ spring.” 
Out she went again, hurrying back with a pitcher 
of water. “ There, I’ll just pitch out what you 
ain’t drank, it’ll go on the flower beds and be 
good for ’em. I wouldn’t wonder if plants got 
thirsty same as us.” She promptly disposed of 


A Country Ride 187 

the water in the glasses, refilled them and con- 
tinued. ‘‘You ain’t all sisters, are you? 
Yes? Wal, I can’t say I think there’s much of 
a family likeness. Lands sakes, you two ain’t 
twins? Who’d ha’ thought it? You ain’t no 
more alike’n me and my sister, and she’s eight 
year older than I am. She’s married to a man 
by name of Slack. Slack by name and slack 
by nature, I say. They live up the road a piece. 
I guess you passed the house, little old yaller 
house back in some pines. You notice it as you 
go by.” She darted forward to pick up Jack’s 
napkin that she had dropped. “ That reminds 
me,” she said, “ I dropped the dishcloth this 
morning, and I says to my daughter s’ I, some- 
body’s coming, and sure enough here you be. 
Had enough? You ain’t very hearty, none o’ 
you. You ought just to see some folks eat. I 
hope you relished your dinner,” she added a little 
anxiously. “ Them fish was caught this morn- 
ing.” 

“ It was all very nice indeed,” said Jack with 
emphasis. She paid the bill and the woman’s 
hard and knotty fingers closed over the money 
eagerly. “ Well, I hope you’ll come again,” she 
told them. “We’d be pleased to see you, and 
if you could see your way clear to mentioning 
Clover dale Inn to any of your young companions, 
we’d take it real kind,” 


i88 The Four Corners at College 

We certainly will do that,” Jack told her. 

She viewed them interestedly as they stood 
together. I wisht you’d tell me your name,” 
she said. “ I dunno as I ever see twins more 
unlike. Have you got any more brothers or 
sisters? ” 

One more sister,” Jack told her. ‘‘ Our 
name is Corner, so we are four Corners, you 
see.” 

Mrs. Goodwin laughed as if she had never 
heard so good a joke. “ I must tell my daughter 
that. I dunno as I ever heard anythin’ more 
comical. Four Corners, are you? Wal, I ain’t 
likely to fergit twins and four Corners if you 
ever come along this way ag’in. Ain’t it a joke 
that there wasn’t five of you? Lands sakes, but 
if it ain’t about as queer as Dick’s hat band.” 

She saw them out to the carriage and as they 
were about to drive off she called, ‘‘ Jest you 
wait a minute,” and darting behind the house 
she came back with some pansies. “ There,” she 
said, “ jest take these along. I can’t git over 
them four Corners. Call again.” 

‘‘ I don’t know which I enjoyed more, the din- 
ner or the funny woman,” said Mary Lee. 
‘‘We must tell the girls about her. Did you 
know she was going to be so funny. Jack? ” 

“ No, I never heard anything about her. Per- 
haps she doesn’t always appear.” 


A Country Ride 189 

“ Then we were highly favored. How she does 
talk. If we went there often we should learn 
all her family history,” said Jean. “We must 
take Nan and Jo some time soon. She would 
like to see the four Corners together. It never 
struck me before that we were so awfully 
funny.” 

“ We certainly seem to have appealed to her 
sense of humor,” returned Mary Lee. 

They journeyed along slowly, for the after- 
noon was before them and there was no haste 
to get back. After a while Jack proposed that 
they should stop and enter a piece of woods 
which looked particularly shady and inviting. 
“ It seems such a nice, quiet retreat,” she said ; 
“ suppose we take our books and go under those 
trees over there. We can fasten the horse in the 
shade and it will be a lovely place to rest and 
read.” 

The other two agreed to this plan. Mary Lee 
and Jean alighted, gathered up their belongings 
and sought the spot Jack had designated, leaving 
her to fasten the horse under a tree by the road- 
side. 

“ IVe brought the carriage robes,” she said 
as she joined them, “ for I thought if we wanted 
to lie down we could spread them on the ground 
under us.” 

“ Good plan,” returned Mary Lee. “ It is so 


190 The Four Corners at College 

quiet and out-of-the-way that we couldn’t find 
a better place to nap in, and I for one feel de- 
cidedly sleepy.” 

They devoted themselves to their books for 
awhile and then one after another stretched her- 
self on the ground under the wide-branched tree 
which made a soft murmur overhead. A small 
brook not far away babbled a pleasant lullaby, 
so that presently each girl, if not actually asleep, 
was drowsily giving herself up to the languor of 
the hour. 

It was Mary Lee who first raised her head, 
then sat up and looked at her watch. “ It is 
time we were moving,” she said. 

Jack opened her sleepy eyes. “ What time is 
it? ” she asked. 

“ It is after four, nearly half past. You, Jean, 
over there, wake up.” 

“ I’m awake,” answered Jean without opening 
her eyes, “ but it is so nice and soothing here I 
hate to move.” 

Jack sprang to her feet. “ I’ll go and unhitch 
the horse and you all come along when you get 
ready. Bring the covers and things.” 

She darted off to where they had left the horse 
and in a few minutes the others came up to find 
her standing still looking up and down the road, 
a bewildered expression on her face. He 
isn’t here,” she said. 


A Country Ride 19 1 

'‘Why, Jack Corner, what do you mean?” 
Mary Lee spoke. 

“ The horse isn’t here. He must have un- 
hitched himself in some way. I don’t suppose 
he has gone far. Probably he is browsing along 
the road. I’ll go and see. He wouldn’t turn 
back, of course, but would follow the road 
home.” 

She hurried off leaving the others looking 
after her. " We might as well walk along 
slowly,” said Mary Lee, " and then there will be 
less distance for Jack to drive back.” 

" You don’t suppose anyone could have stolen 
him,” suggested Jean. 

“ Oh, dear, let us hope not, though it is quite 
possible that it could have been done while we 
were lying there asleep.” They saw Jack ahead, 
walking rapidly and looking this way and that. 

“ Poor Jack,” said Jean commiseratingly, " she 
looks awfully worried. This is her expedition, 
you see, and she feels all the responsibility.” 

Presently Jack stood still in front of a gate, 
then she walked on, but in a moment she turned 
back and they saw her enter the gateway. 
" She’s going up to that house,” exclaimed Jean, 
seeing a building through the trees. They quick- 
ened their pace a little and finally came up to a 
yellow house. " This must be where the Slacks 
live,” remarked Jean. " Shall we go in? There 


192 The Four Corners at College 

is Jack talking to someone.’^ They entered the 
gate and found Jack in earnest conversation with 
a tall gaunt woman who had an expression of 
patient reserve rather than of grim reticence. 

‘‘ This is Mrs. Slack,’’ said Jack as her sisters 
came up. She is going to send down to the 
stables and find out whether anyone saw our 
horse go by.” 

‘‘ Won’t you take seats,” said Mrs. Slack, offer- 
ing them chairs upon the porch. Then she went 
off leaving them talking together in low tones. 

‘‘Do you know that she is Mrs. Slack?” 
queried Jean. 

“ Why, I guessed it was, for you see this is 
the yellow house, and the place isn’t kept up well 
at all. ‘ Slack by name and slack by nature,’ 
you know. I asked her if her sister wasn’t Mrs. 
Goodwin at Cloverdale Inn and she said it was, 
so that settled it.” 

In a few minutes Mrs. Slack returned with a 
grubby old man who “ rather guessed ” he had 
seen the horse go by about half an hour ago. 
He was walking kinder slow, and he sorter won- 
dered if there was anybody driving him, for he 
didn’t notice anybody on the front seat. Why 
didn’t he go out and see? Wal, it wasn’t no 
consarn of his, and he wasn’t one to meddle with 
other folks’es affairs. He rather, guessed if any- 
one should meet up with the team along the road 


193 


A Country Ride 

they’d likely stop him. Anyway the horse would 
likely go straight back to his stable; he guessed 
there wasn’t no use worryin’.” 

The girls looked at one another. This was 
rather poor consolation, but they made the best 
of it, and after thanking the spiritless woman 
and the shiftless man they opened the rickety 
gate and proceeded on their dusty way. 

“ ‘ Slack by name and slack by nature,’ I 
should say,” remarked Jack disgustedly. ‘‘ Why 
couldn’t he have had the gumption to stop that 
horse ? ” 

Too lazy,” said Mary Lee. 

“ It looks as if we’d have to foot it back to 
town,” said Jack, if all the people along the 
road are as stupid as that, or — I tell you what, 
girls, don’t you walk any further. Just sit down 
in the first shady place and I’ll go on to the next 
house and see if I can hire a team to take us back, 
or one with which we can at least overtake the 
horse. I’ll drive back for you.” 

After some persuasion Jack was allowed to 
have her way, for the next house was not more 
than half a mile off and looked hopeful from this 
distance. So Jack trudged on and it was not 
long before they saw her driving toward them 
at a spanking pace. “It looks like the same 
horse,” said Mary Lee, viewing the approaching 
steed. 


194 Four Corners at College 

“ So it does.” And as Jack arrived it was 
found out that they were right. 

‘‘ I found him all right,” cried Jack in pleased 
tones. “ Those were people with some sense. 
They said they saw the horse walking along just 
as complacently as you please, but they noticed 
no one was in the carriage, so they stopped him 
and decided to keep him there for awhile, and 
if no one claimed him they were going to take 
him back to town where he belonged. They 
recognized that he came from Tuttle’s stables. I 
gave them a dollar; it was all I had and they let 
me take the horse. He must have worked his 
hitching strap loose, for it was hanging. I am 
glad I tied the reins around the whip for if they 
had dragged they might have tripped the horse, 
or have scared him so that he would have run 
away.” 

“ Poor Jack,” said Jean; “ it’s been an expen- 
sive day for you. You must let us pay our 
share.” 

“ No, you won’t,” declared Jack. “ It is my 
expedition, and if I am a dollar, more or less, 
out that is my aifair. I’ll make it up in some 
way. Get in and be thankful you can.” Such 
matters did not greatly disturb Jack. So long 
as everything turned out well she never troubled 
herself about what had gone before, and the 
extra expense was a matter of small concern. 


A Country Ride 1915 

She might have to give up something, well and 
good; or she might even have to borrow, what 
difference ? When her next allowance arrived 
she would pay her debts and start afresh. She 
even derived a certain pleasure from her diffi- 
culties for they made life more exciting, and she 
was willing to pay for excitement. So now she 
turned her head and said to the two on the back 
seat, After all it made our trip quite out of the 
common, didn’t it ? ” 

‘‘ But I should think you would be worn out, 
Jack, after that long dusty walk,” returned Jean. 

Oh, I didn’t mind that. I’ll get rested now,” 
said Jack. I’d rather be tired and have the ad- 
venture.” 

“ Isn’t that just like Jack,” whispered Jean. 

“ I think the horse behaved mighty well after 
all,” said Jack, turning around again. “ I shall 
find out his name and ask for him next time, 
for you see we can depend on him, can’t we, 
Dobbin, or whatever your name is? You shall 
have a lump of sugar next time.” 

There were no more adventures, and they 
reached their destination with no regrets on the 
part of Jack who was pleased that she had given 
Mary Lee a new experience, and who, after de- 
positing this elder sister at the door of her 
dormitory, drove off cheerfully, the most philo- 
sophical of all the four Corners. 



t 






CHAPTER XII 


NAN WRITES A PLAY 

June brought the girls face to face with the 
fact that separations must be counted upon, and 
many were the tears shed, the promises given, 
the friendships pledged as the Seniors passed out 
of college. 

I shall miss you beyond words,’' said Nan 
as she and Rita took their last walk together by 
the lake. What will the Euterpe Club be with- 
out you ? Oh, Rita, don’t give me up because you 
don’t see me so often.” 

Give you up. Nan, dear, I shall never give 
you up, but this is not a real parting, I hope, for 
you must come to the island this summer.” 

“ I’m not thinking about the summer ; it’s next 
year I’m thinking of,” responded Nan dolefully. 

But that is still some distance off, so let us 
look forward to the speedy meeting rather than 
the later parting,” returned Rita. 

It was Mary Lee and Jo whom Miss Helen 
Corner took abroad that summer; for all felt 
that associations would be too sad if the entire 
company were to spend the holidays at home. 


200 The Four Corners at College 

One of their number would be greatly missed, 
and there would be little heart for the old frolics. 
Therefore Mrs. Corner, Nan and the twins spent 
a few weeks only in the old brown house and in 
August went to the island where Rita had already 
gone, finding there a quiet cottage in which they 
could board and be free of any social claims 
while enjoying the vitalizing air and the out-of- 
door life. Rita was at her grandfather’s cottage, 
while at Mrs. Larrabee’s was Rob Powell, so 
that Nan did not want for a cavalier at dances, 
picnics, excursions or sailing parties. Young 
people were not very numerous at this quiet 
place, but there were always enough within hail 
to join in any good time, and there were no 
disturbing elements. Rita claimed Nan for the 
Christmas holidays, which the remaining three 
Corners had promised to spend in New York 
with the Pinckneys, and Nan tried to exact a 
promise from Rita to spend Easter with her, but 
Rita would do no more than say that she would 
surely be at Bettersley for the Commencement as 
she must see Robin take his degree at Yale. So 
they all parted with the anticipation of more than 
one meeting during the next year. 

Mary Lee came back the better for her experi- 
ences and ready to take up her college life with 
greater spirit. Time, the great healer, with 
Change as an assistant, had worked to bring 


201 


Nan Writes a Play 

her back to a normal state, and though she would 
never forget her first early love, she was too 
young not to find new interests and by degrees 
to share those things in which her comrades took 
part. 

Jack had been made president of her class to 
her great satisfaction. She nearly matched Nan 
in the matter of inches this year. She was a 
person whose methods were not always strictly 
systematic, but she usually found a means of 
arriving at results which the less brilliant Jean 
reached only by patient plodding. Sometimes 
Jack's methods were a little too original, but her 
downfall always took the complexion of a joke, 
so that it generally appeared intentional. 

With Rita, Lillian, Alice Bronson and many 
others stricken from the Euterpe Club’s list of 
members. Nan felt that the club had lost much of 
its former interest, but when she was elected 
president in Rita’s place some of the old ardor 
returned and with the responsibility came the en- 
thusiasm. 

A little group of girls gathered in the Corners’ 
room one afternoon at the beginning of the term. 
“You will do it. Nan,” begged Jo; “I really 
haven’t time.” 

“ No more have I,” responded Nan. 

“ But you don’t have any outside work like 
tutoring,” pleaded Jo. “ I don’t feel as if I 


202 The Four Corners at College 

could give up any such chance that comes my 
way.” 

‘‘ No, of course not,” Nan responded with less 
show of protest. 

‘‘ And there is no one else who could begin to 
do it so well,” put in Ruth Moulton, one of the 
Juniors. 

‘‘ Thanks,” returned Nan. Anyone else a 
spoonful of honey to contribute in order to trap 
this bear?” 

It isn’t for any ulterior motive,” declared 
Jo. We don’t want to chain you up and teach 
you to dance by putting hot plates under your 
feet. It is for the glory of the class. We want 
the best original play we can get and we believe 
you are the one who can best write it.” 

‘‘ Besides, Nan,” spoke up Elsie Cook, another 
of the girls, you know that Jo takes the prin- 
cipal character and there is no one who would 
understand so well as you, how to write up to 
her special abilities.” 

“ That is perfectly true,” agreed Ruth. 

“ I don’t see why you couldn’t do it. Nan.” 
Mary Lee came in with her opinion. 

‘VDo I see signs of weakening?” whispered 
Ruth, as Nan made no reply. 

Well, I’ll think about it,” said Nan at last. 

“ That won’t do,” objected Jo. “ We must 
know at once, for a play we must have and there 


203 


Nan Writes a Play 

is no time to lose. If you can’t do it we shall 
have to get someone more willing if less capa- 
ble.” 

“ A sort of back-handed compliment,” re- 
marked Nan smiling. “Well, girls, the most I 
can say is that I’ll make a try at it. If I fail, you 
mustn’t hold me accountable.” 

“ You won’t fail,” returned Jo positively. 
“ The promise to try is all we need, girls. She 
can do it without a doubt.” 

“ If I get stuck I shall call on you,” said Nan 
with a little show of doubt as to her powers. 

“ Yes, if you get stuck,” agreed Jo, “ but you 
won’t; I prophesy that.” 

“ As soon as you have the thing fonnulated in 
your mind just give us the skeleton of your plan 
so we can be thinking up costumes and stage 
effects and things,” said Elsie, “ for there never 
is as much time as we want, as you know from 
the experiences of past years.” 

Nan laughed. “ You are taking too much for 
granted, I am afraid. How do you know my 
efforts will be approved ? ” 

“ I’m not afraid,” returned Elsie. 

“ Well, certainly if encouragement and beauti- 
ful confidence in my ability can work any result, 
I should not fail,” returned Nan. From that 
day for some weeks she had a far-away, absorbed 
look whenever there came a moment’s leisure. 


204 The Four Corners at College 

At meals one would see her scribble a word or 
two upon the fly leaf of some book she might 
happen to have with her; her sheets of music 
bore disjointed sentences. She would suddenly 
pop up from her bed after Mary Lee thought 
her well settled for sleep, and would turn on the 
light and sit there writing while her sister 
dreamed away the moments. But the result was 
that the play grew into something tangible, and 
in time was completed and received the stamp of 
approval, so far as the mere lines went. 

It’s great. Nan,” declared Jo. “I said you 
could do it.” 

Don’t be too sure yet,” Nan warned her. 
“ There is still a lot to think out ; all the business, 
the staging and all that.” 

“ I know enough to see whither it is tending,” 
replied Jo. ‘‘ Nan, I don’t see but that you’ll 
have to take a part yourself; you would be so 
nice and tall for the hero, and you could do it 
so well. ‘ The Serenade ’ — that is the very name 
for it, but it would be so much more effective if 
that fetching song were given in some other than 
a piping female voice. I don’t forget those deep 
notes of yours when you are pretending to sing 
with masculine effect. Oh, Nan, do say you will 
be my lover; you will be just the one for the 
part.” 

Nan laughed. “ How many lovers do you 


Nan Writes a Play 205 

want, pray? I should think you’d be satisfied 
with those you have.” 

But it would be such fun,” Jo went on, 
“wouldn’t it, girls? We just must have you. 
Nan.” 

“ Yes, Nan, we must,” spoke up the others. 

But Nan was not so easy to persuade. “ Play- 
wright and player, too? ” she exclaimed. “ That 
would be too much of a good thing. My name 
is not William Shakespeare.” 

But at last all her objections were overcome, 
and she consented to become the serenader, to 
wear the Spanish cloak and sombrero, and to 
strum her guitar under the window of her lady- 
love. Nan had not a particularly strong voice 
except when she lowered it to obtain a masculine 
quality, as Jo had reminded her. In their old- 
time frolics Nan had often imitated a grufif- 
voiced darky singing camp-meeting hymns, and 
had even succeeded in singing ballads in a lower 
key than seemed possible, to the entertainment 
of her college mates, so that they knew whereof 
they spoke when they urged her to undertake the 
little Spanish song which she had brought from 
Spain. 

In due time all the stage business and setting 
was planned out. Nan had made all her scenes 
to take place upon such a little plaza as she had 
known in the small village where she and Mary 


2 o 6 The Four Corners at College 

Lee had passed part of the summer, and had 
arranged to have it picturesque without undue 
work. 

Mary Lee declined to take part except in a 
very modest way, but she was invaluable in giv- 
ing suggestions as to dress and conduct. She 
and Nan sent home for the foreign costumes 
which they had brought from Spain and these 
were used as models for the others. The pretty 
dance called the jota was introduced, Nan supply- 
ing the proper music for this, and Mary Lee be- 
ing indefatigable in teaching the dancers. So 
altogether the play promised to have some attract- 
ive as well as unusual features. 

‘‘ If we could only get a real live donkey,’^ said 
Jo, ‘‘wouldn’t it be great? In that scene. Nan, 
where the young peasant, Manuel, first meets 
Rosario in the market, it would be so fetching. 
Of course it could be left out, but I think it would 
add greatly to it to have Manuel, at least, come 
in with the donkey; it wouldn’t have to stay 
on.” 

“ It would be a good touch,” returned Nan 
musingly. “ I wonder if it would be possible to 
get a tractable beast anywhere within gunshot.” 

“ It wouldn’t do any harm to inquire at 
Rayner Hall, or, indeed, here at college. Some 
of the girls might be able to put us on the track. 
They might have brothers or sisters who drove 


207 


Nan Writes a Play 

a donkey cart. We have such interesting fea- 
tures already, I know, but this would cap the 
climax. The girls are so pleased that Mary Lee 
is teaching them the jota, and you come upon 
them snapping their fingers, and turning this 
way and that, every'vvhere you go. We must 
have that donkey if possible, and I mustn’t for- 
get to see about the tambourines. I mean that 
the fame of this play shall be handed down the 
centuries.” 

Nan laughed. ‘‘ It will be on account of the 
staging and the actors, then, the donkey being 
first walking gentleman, if donkey we can get.” 

After many efforts and much inquiry it was 
learned that a donkey belonging to the brothers 
of one of the Rayner Hall girls, was a possi- 
bility, and Jo started off one afternoon in search 
of him. One of the twins and the girl whose 
brother owned the creature made up the 
party. 

Jo returned about dusk and came whirling into 
the Corners’ room. “ We’ve got him,” she 
cried, or at least we shall have him. The Hale 
boys were delighted to let us have him; they 
think it is such an honor and that it is such a 
joke, too, for their donkey to be cast for a part. 
They are to drive him over with the cart, go back 
by trolley and their sisters will drive back with 
Master Neddy. He is a dear little fellow. 


2o8 The Four Corners at College 

though I fancy in much better condition than 
if he lived in Spain.” 

‘‘ You needn’t think all the donkeys in Spain 
are ill-treated,” Mary Lee spoke up. Some 
of them are made as great pets of as they would 
be here, but won’t he be an addition to our cast. 
Nan ? I am so pleased over it. Jo, you are won- 
derful ; the way you do get things, is beyond me.” 

‘‘ How are things going on? ” Jo asked. 

‘‘ Pretty well in some directions, though one 
can never tell how it is going to be at the last 
moment. Did you have time to see about the 
pottery, Jo?” 

“ Yes, I think that is all right, and Ruth has 
found a basket place where she can get some- 
thing that will serve for panniers. The Hale 
boys said they would experiment in leading up 
Master Neddy, so he would not be suddenly con- 
fronted with the unexpected and balk. Nice lit- 
tle lads; they were so excited and interested. 
Now to work.” 

The time grew shorter and shorter and the girls 
worked like beavers, the last rehearsal found 
them all over-critical and in consequence scarce 
up to their best, but when the great hour came 
not one but was keyed up to the highest pitch of 
determination to make it a go ” as they said. 

The first scene showed the market place where 
young Manuel appeared with his burro which 


209 


Nan Writes a Play 

bore panniers filled with earthenware. The 
stage had been carefully set and looked well. The 
women squatting behind their baskets of eggs, ap- 
ples or nuts, the display of gay calicoes on the 
ground, the piles of vegetables, the cries of the 
venders, all were most realistic, and then entered 
Manuel in the person of Nan leading her donkey. 
But just as she, dazzled by the gay and sparkling 
Rosario, began her tender speech, Master Neddy, 
as if believing that he must also speak his lines, 
lifted up his voice and woke the echoes by his 
braying to the discomfiture of Nan and the joy of 
the audience. 

However, the wild outburst of mirth lasted no 
longer than the time it required to make Master 
Neddy disappear behind the scenes, and Nan left 
donkeyless began her speech over again and car- 
ried out her part effectively. 

The second scene showed the silent plaza at 
night, with Jo as Rosario on her balcony and 
Manuel below strumming his guitar, and the third 
and final represented a fiesta where the jota was 
danced and where a strolling gipsy band appeared. 
The young peasant Manuel is discovered to be 
of high birth and Rosario’s father consents to 
their marriage. There were many pretty little 
touches and some humorous ones, while the music 
added much to the pleasure and effect. A storm 
of applause followed the lowering of the curtain 


210 The Four Corners at College 

and the performers felt that their efforts were not 
unrewarded. 

We worked like Turks,” declared Jo behind 
the scenes, throwing off her mantilla and fan- 
ning herself, ‘‘ but it paid. My ! dancing the jota 
is warm work. Oh, Nan, how did you feel when 
Neddy lifted up his voice in that blatant man- 
ner ? ” 

I felt as Balaam must have done,” returned 
Nan. I was completely overcome for a mo- 
ment and felt like rushing off the stage and 
throwing myself into the lake. Then I said to 
myself, ‘ So much the more realistic,^ and I de- 
cided to go on, though my next fear was that 
Neddy would kick up his heels and break all that 
precious pottery. I was so relieved when — 
who was it? — led him off the stage.” 

It was Louie Allers. I wonder if anyone in 
front suspected that it was not a pre-arranged 
piece of business. Manuel would naturally be 
supposed to hang on to his wares.” 

“ I don’t believe a soul suspected,” spoke up 
Ruth; “ if anyone questions we can just say that 
Louie was a partner of Manuel’s and was lead- 
ing off the donkey to divest him of his burden so 
that it could be spread out for all to see. Oh, no, 
I don’t believe it seemed a fiasco to anyone. 
Nan, you did the song beautifully. I slipped out 
in front during that act, and it went perfectly. It 


2II 


Nan Writes a Play 

was .quite thrilling when the father appeared, and 
you had to face him there in the moonlight. I 
was sorry not to be one of the audience all 
through.” 

So the performers comforted and encouraged 
one another while later came the praise of the 
audience. 

‘‘ Oodles of compliments. Nan, for you,” said 
Jo rushing into the room the next day. “ I tell 
you. Miss Corner, Pm not in it. I believe half 
the girls, especially the dear Freshmen, are in 
love with Manuel, and are wishing you were a 
really, righty man. You’ll be gazed upon and 
admired from this out, and if you drop a hairpin 
or a handkerchief you must never expect to see it 
again. A playwright as well as a charming 
Spanish cavalier will prove too much for those 
dear little flighty brains.” 

“ Nonsense,” returned Nan. ‘‘ I haven’t a 
doubt but you are just as liable to be sweethearted 
by our sister class. I noticed more than one pair 
of eyes following you adoringly as we came out 
of chapel, and I heard more than one whisper of 
‘ There she goes.’ You will be having love-let- 
ters and flowers and candy, and nobody knows 
what, after this.” 

Both Jo and Nan were right as time proved. 
‘‘ The Serenade ” was a play long remembered by 
the girls of both the upper and lower classes. 


212 The Four Corners at College 

Nan’s fame, too, went abroad. Rita wrote to her 
that she had heard of her laurels, and wouldn’t 
she please to send her a copy of the play. Rob 
Powell came up from Yale the next week and 
wished that he might have been among the audi- 
ence, for John Townsend’s sister, of the Fresh- 
man class, had written a eulogy eight pages long 
to her brother, and couldn’t Rob be allowed a 
reading of the play and wouldn’t Nan allow him 
to show it to John? It was a wonder that all this 
did not make Nan vain and tiresome, but a wise 
mother and an aunt who desired the best develop- 
ment of the girls, had been such counselors as 
saved the Corner girls from setting undue value 
upon flattery. 




CHAPTER XIII 


AN ICE CARNIVAL 

I REALLY believe it is going to be possible/^ 
said Mary Lee, delicately scratching at a frosted 
scene upon the window pane. ‘‘ It’s getting 
colder and colder, Nan.” 

“ Ugh ! I should think it was,” responded 
Nan, hugging the heater. “ Em nearly frozen.” 

‘‘ The ice will be fine,” Mary Lee went on, 

and if there doesn’t come a thaw or a snow- 
storm before we are ready we can surely have a 
good time. I’m glad I learned to skate when we 
were at the Wadsworth school, for I have en- 
joyed it here and abroad, too. Shall you go on 
the ice. Nan? ” 

“ Don’t think so. My efforts lie in other di- 
rections this year. I had my experiences over in 
Munich, and they will last me. Of course you’ll 
go, Mary Lee.” 

‘‘ Yes, I think I shall, and Jo said she would. 
I don’t see how that girl accomplishes so much. 
She manages to be in everything she cares for, 
keeps up with her work, and has all that tutoring 
outside, when it is as much as I can do to get 


2i6 The Four Corners at College 

through my college work and have a modest de- 
gree of recreation.” 

‘‘Jo always was a hustler,” returned Nan. 
“ She has such a bright mind that she grasps 
things easily, and then she hasn’t a lazy bone in 
her body. Do throw me a wrap; that worsted 
scarf will do ; I am so stiff with cold I can scarcely 
write.” 

“ ril put on the kettle and we’ll have some tea ; 
that will warm us up,” rejoined her sister, coming 
away from the window and tossing a crimson 
worsted scarf to Nan. “ Some of the girls will 
be sure to drop in directly and will be glad of a 
cheering cup.” She started the blaze under the 
tea-kettle while Nan continued to scribble away. 
Their rooms were less decorated than when they 
occupied Mrs. Thayer’s second floor, right, but 
if these were more artistic they were still home- 
like and cozy. Every chair had been tested at 
the time of purchase and must first be pronounced 
comfortable before it was declared to have good 
lines. The pictures were few but carefully 
chosen, and the sofa pillows displayed a more 
harmonious combination of colors than had ex- 
isted in previous years. 

Mary Lee was right in predicting callers, for 
the water had not boiled before Jo came in, then 
Ruth Moulton, followed by a couple of youthful 
Freshmen who looked upon Nan, Mary Lee and 


An Ice Carnival 


217 


Jo as the star trio, the first representing Genius, 
the second Romance, the third the Spirit of Fun. 
For a long time they had worshiped from afar 
but at last had found means of creeping within 
the charmed circle to make timid offerings and 
to sit in silent rapture within the sanctuary which 
enshrined the three goddesses. There were 
others who still worshiped from afar and were 
filled with envy of the privileges enjoyed by these 
two. The pair, who had just arrived, after re- 
ceiving their cups of tea from the hands of Ro- 
mance and their biscuits from Genius, gloated 
over the words of joyous wisdom vouchsafed 
them by the Spirit of Fun, but feeling that they 
must not presume upon the graciousness of the 
revered three, soon took their departure, whis- 
pering excitedly in the corridor. “ Isn’t she too 
sweet for words? Wasn’t it thrilling? Don’t 
you wish you were so witty and clever? ” 

“ We’ve been down to the lake,” announced 
Ruth, “ and the ice will be inches thick by to- 
morrow morning. Really, Mary Lee, I should 
think by another night it might be perfect. 
There is no wind ; only that still cold that freezes 
solidly and smoothly.” 

Then we can really have our Ice Carnival, I 
hope,” added Jo. “ We’ve been longing for one 
each year and this is the first that has given any 
real promise. We must seize the opportunity be- 


2i8 The Four Corners at College 

fore it is too late, and make our preparations at 
once. No one knows when the weather may 
change fatefully for us.’' 

I agree with you that we should take time 
by the forelock,” said Mary Lee. “ What shall 
we need to prepare, Jo? ” 

‘‘ Well, I suppose we shall keep open house at 
all the Clubs, have fireworks, music and Japanese 
lanterns. I’ve been talking to some of the Sen- 
iors and they say that is the way we must do 
things.” 

We will carry our lanterns on hockey sticks,” 
put in Ruth, ‘‘ and we must have illuminations, 
especially down by the lake.” 

‘‘Won’t it be beautiful?” cried Mary Lee. 
“ Each girl should have as fetching a costume 
as she can, to make it more brilliant; a lot of 
red will go well. I’ll see what I can do for 
others besides myself.” 

“ Good idea,” agreed Ruth. “ I’ll do the 
same.” 

A knock at the door was answered to Emily 
Taylor and Madge Wright who joined the group 
and entered into the plans for the Carnival, then 
all the girls started forth to hunt up the proper 
ones to take charge of the arrangements, and be- 
fore night fell it was all settled, provided the 
weather played no tricks. 

The skies were scanned anxiously the next 


An Ice Carnival 


219 


day but neither snow nor thaw threatened; the 
weather continued to be clear and cold and the 
ice was in perfect condition. 

From the Club houses gleamed welcoming 
lights while within were tables spread with com- 
forting tea, coffee, bouillon, sandwiches. In 
some cases even more elaborate fare was offered 
to those who would partake. The swinging 
lanterns, carried over the skaters’ shoulders on 
hockey sticks, gave a cheerful glow of color, 
while their twinkling beams picked out the scar- 
lets, greens and yellows in the girls’ costumes, or 
shot a sudden thread of silver across the smooth 
ice. Lanterns, too, were strung along the shores 
of the lake, at each side of which blazed fires 
built after the manner of those at a rustic camp- 
meeting. Every now and then the red, blue and 
green lights of Roman candles obscured the 
colors of the lanterns, pin wheels dazzled the be- 
holder, and an occasional rocket mounting up 
to the clear sky would fall in a shower of stars 
upon the interlaced branches of the bare trees. 

“ It is the very lovliest thing yet,” asserted 
Mary Lee as she stood panting after a long spin 
across the lake. I wish Nan would come out. 
Where is she, Jo? ” 

“ In the Club house, I suppose, pouring choco- 
late. There is a good rousing fire there and 
they are having music. I suppose it is too cold 


220 The Four Corners at College 

out here for a band to stay all the time, so they 
have carried in their instruments to thaw them 
out. It is too cold even to sing. I tried it and 
the first cadence froze a half inch from my lips, 
so no one heard it at all.’' 

‘‘ It isn’t too cold to skate,” averred Mary Lee. 

Come on.” And the two swept off over the 
glittering ice. 

Nan, inside the warm and hospitable Club 
house, was enjoying herself quite as much as 
these outsiders. A great fire blazed in the big 
fireplace; there were flowers in the vases and 
plants rearing green fronds in the corners. All 
was warmth, soft lights and comfort. Once in 
a while Nan would throw on her fur-lined coat, 
put something over her head and would run 
down to watch the skaters, but when toes and 
finger tips were unable longer to endure the cold, 
back she would fly to the luxurious warmth of 
her own or another Club house from whose 
windows she could watch the gay scene outside. 
Songs floated out upon the keen air of the winter 
night as a door of one of the Club houses suddenly 
opened, and louder strains came from the band 
which could play but one selection before seek- 
ing cover, so cold was it. Fortified by hot con- 
coctions they would fare out to the open after 
being thawed out, to enliven the hours by a gay 
waltz or a stirring march. 


An Ice Carnival 


221 


“ Aren’t you skating, Nan? ” asked one of her 
friends, coming up to where Nan was looking out 
on the pretty sights. 

“ No,” she replied. “ It is Mary Lee who 
takes to the lake in the winter, I am a summer 
girl.” 

I thought all you Corners were for sports. 
I saw that tall young sister of yours skating like 
a breeze the other day on Collins’ Pond.” 

“ Oh, we do sport, all of us, but I would 
rather row than skate and would rather be too 
warm than too cold. That is why I am here. 
Jack skates very well, but Jean is too timid and 
prefers a nice ladylike game of basket ball, 
though they both like to row.” 

“ I suppose your sisters will be coming into 
college just as you go out.” 

Yes, the dear things. I wish we could all 
be here at the same time but it won’t work that 
way. They cannot be Freshmen till we cease be- 
ing Seniors. Who is that singing in Dendron? ” 
That’s Rosalie Adams, I believe. She has 
a rather nice voice.” 

“ A Sophomore, isn’t she ? ” 

Yes, and a nice girl, I am told.” 

“ Why isn’t she in the Euterpe ? ” 

‘‘ Don’t know. Hasn’t been asked, probably.” 
I must go over and meet her. Will you 
come with me, Ruth ? ” 


222 .The Four Corners at College 
Glad to.’’ 

The two went out into the cold fresh air. 
The skaters seemed as gay and untiring as ever, 
but the band had ceased playing and the last of 
the fireworks were going up. Some of the 
lanterns, too, had burned down and their glory 
had departed. 

It’s most over,” remarked Ruth. “ I see 
some of the girls taking off their skates already, 
but it has been a great night. I am glad we 
didn’t have to miss it this year. Such an uncertain 
thing as the weather doesn’t admit of positive 
plans for an Ice Carnival every year.” 

It was not long before the lake was deserted. 
Only a few lanterns showed their luminous reds 
and yellows, but class yells rent the air and even 
the ‘‘ nipping and eager air ” did not prevent the 
singing which kept up while the girls wound 
their way to the various buildings. Soon the 
lanterns had burnt out and the only lights were 
those which twinkled from the windows, and 
those which still shone in the heavens above. 

Jack and Jean, who had been deeply interested 
in the Ice Carnival, did not make their appear- 
ance the next day so early as their sisters ex- 
pected, but they came in late in the afternoon. 

‘‘We have something to tell you,” Jean be- 
gan. 

‘‘Very important?” asked Nan lightly. 


An Ice Carnival 


223 

You’ll think so when you know,” answered 
Jean. 

“More important than the Ice Carnival?” 
asked Mary Lee. “ We thought you’d be over 
early to hear about that.” 

“ I should think a human life was more im- 
portant,” replied Jean with dignity, and with the 
air of one who knows she has made a sensation. 

“ Why, what do you mean ? ” asked Mary Lee, 
“ and why is Jack so silent ? She is usually ready 
enough to be spokesman.” 

“ It is because she is such a heroine,” answered 
Jean solemnly. “ She has saved a life.” Then 
satisfied at having thrown this bombshell of in- 
formation she paused in order to allow her sisters 
to recover from the shock. 

“Why, Jean Corner!” Nan was the first to 
regain her speech. “ Go on and tell us, and don’t 
sit there like a bump on a log, or let Jack tell 
if you can’t.” 

“ Don’t be so impatient,” responded Jean. 
“ I’ll tell you if you give me time. It is as 
solemn as saying your prayers and you shouldn’t 
make me hurry over it. Where shall I begin? 
Oh, yes; we all started to the pond, Collins’ 
Pond, you know. I don’t care much about skat- 
ing for I hate to have my heels go flying from 
under me and find myself suddenly seeing stars, 
but I thought I’d go and watch the others for 


224 The Four Corners at College 

a little while. There were ever so many girls on 
the ice, and after a while Jack and Mollie Kim- 
ball started a race. Mollie got a little ahead, 
and then Jack did, then Mollie put on all her 
speed and passed Jack, but just as she did we 
suddenly heard a scream and saw Mollie disap- 
pear. Oh, it was an awful moment. I shall 
never forget it. The other girls screamed and 
all began running to the spot, but Jack shouted : 
‘ Keep away, all of you ! Go back, the ice is 
thin. Go back ! ’ 

‘‘Oh, Jack!’’ Nan seized Jack’s hand and 
held it. “ Suppose you had gone in, too.” 

“ But I didn’t,” returned Jack calmly. 

“Go on, Jean. What happened next?” in- 
quired Mary Lee, all interest. 

“ Then Jack threw herself flat down on the 
edge of the ice and tried to grab Mollie, but 
the ice kept breaking around the edge so she 
had to keep inching further and further away, 
and couldn’t quite reach Mollie. So then she 
took off her fur scarf and flung it out and called, 
‘ Two girls come and hold on to my feet.’ Two 
girls ran and did that, and pretty soon we saw 
Mollie struggling. ‘ Catch hold ! Catch hold ! ’ 
Jack cried, flinging her the scarf, and Mollie had 
wit enough to do as she was told, so Jack could 
draw her in. I don’t see how she did it, for 
Mollie isn’t very small, but she did it and we 



The Start 















V'-^ ^7 


. tft 






s 




‘"ifjr ■ ^ •! ’J"** 

Af^** % • 




V„ -'^^’‘V.»| /, ^ *'■ ■ 

7.-^;^ -»- > » 


1 


* ■^1 ; • 


^ »* . vjisy 

1-- 








?*? 


r»n ' cacy't*^’ • "=*--" V 

'arjfe.. L£«Xn^ ^4-. ^r ■ ^ - ■ • 

> *i7. # 




' ^>\i< ♦- * f • 


» '^ ^ ^ * **■ 


♦ . 1 




•Hi? ♦ef‘-,'/n&;;' ' ■ ■’■'>-l*^‘';-',-i^j 

- T? . .. -f ^ 


.r • A? 


iry 










•‘‘rvv 








tS» ^ V 




JJt. 


a*. . -u; 

MQ piT^ » |A 


.» ' 


^ A p . a: -^v c 




!> «. 








4- i' 




\ i 


• w. 


- ■5 '''’’v-" 5.-^'" 


l-A* 


r*-- ^ 




.7 


'pHf 




^ * 


*T. • 


* - *•■*'*• ■' , , * ^ 


.Ji->y 


£f#J 






^ \ 


?• 


r?: 


v**^ 5* ‘^•c’"! « • 'T* ► 

'. *' 7* ■' ■ "■ V— ^ 






i>y 


ir??^^' “ ’ «.> '•'7" - r tj£2? v^ic" " ‘ - ■ ^. ™ ■ .' '^t • '-«-'il 

r-m 

-f«.* " rA^^3S3JvAffr^£fiKii ■ -yf * * ^ ^ 

T|f Miiii m\ iiiiMKitwi T f^\ I .♦■• - .-■ ^a^.'4iSli7?.:JA'- . -‘V ■ .. 


- >r ■? 








Itr-'! 


>1 




» -.^T 






vT 


is: 


■A' 










V 




S ; 




m 


7-^ 




4,_ 




L . ^ *^- 




,»-V 


'<J. 








jt 


i J^S 


i • . .- 


<» 


5^3feR 








§r^ 




" V. 




^1 


V T^; 


a^' 






ll-t* 




■i^:' 








I’Si’ • **'. 






t^y] 












fcii 


r>4^' 


A. y 




;> 'i. 




i4A 


'->T 






W i J 




W‘. •*< ^•t 




\->> 


>; c- 




A . 






2 • 


' 3 ?: 




-5-^v 


*47 








V- 


tr 




^Tr>S- 


: *i 


rwt- 






\ w 














,Vv^- 




A >*A 








'ii 


»y\ 


IW 






-'s- 






'4.- 






o: 








An Ice Carnival 


225 


got Mollie out and on the thicker ice. She was 
wet to the skin, of course, but we managed 
to get her home and now she is in bed and all 
right, I guess. Wasn’t it splendid of Jack to be 
so quick-witted ? ” 

‘‘ It was, indeed,” said Nan enthusiastically, 
though the tears came to her eyes. 

“ Oh, anybody could have done it,” said Jack 
gruffly. I don’t see why everyone made such 
a fuss. It was easy enough to do and I wasn’t 
in any danger while the girls held my feet.” 

‘‘ Suppose the ice had broken where you 
were.” 

‘‘ Well, they wouldn’t have let go, though it 
might have been bad for Mollie, for she might 
have gone down altogether. • She can’t swim and 
I can.” 

But in that icy water.” Mary Lee 
shuddered. ‘‘ Besides there would have been no 
chance to swim.” 

“ Well,” responded Jack, “ it’s all over and we 
are both safe, so there is no use bothering about 
what might have happened when it didn’t. Now 
tell me about the Ice Carnival. I’m sick of 
hearing about Mollie Kimball. I wanted to come 
over here long ago, but they all made such a 
fuss I couldn’t. I wish they’d stop calling me 
a heroine; it’s so stupid to have them mauling 
you and calling you all sorts of names.” 


226 The Four Corners at College 

‘‘ Oh, Jack,’’ objected Jean, “ they didn’t call 
you any but nice names, like ‘ darling thing,’ and 
‘ brave girl,’ ” 

I’d just as soon they’d call me a hlooming 
idiot or a shote as any of those silly molly-coddle 
names,” returned Jack with disgust. “ I hate to 
have people fall on my neck and pat me on the 
back. They might as well call out the band and 
make a guy of me at once.” 

She was so funnily in earnest that the others 
laughed and began to tell her of the events of 
the night before, to which Jack listened with much 
more interest than to the tale of her own deeds. 
After her curiosity was satisfied Jean would hark 
back to the original subject and Jack became rest- 
less. 

I came over here to get rid of all that,” 
she said, “ and you will keep talking about it. 
Nan, I hope you and Mary Lee won’t go spread- 
ing it all over college, and for pity’s sake, don’t 
let it get into any of your old college papers. 
If you do you’ll make me wish I’d let Mollie 
drown.” 

“O Jack!” protested Jean in a horror- 
stricken voice. “ How can you say such dread- 
ful things. I should think you would be very, 
very glad to have done such a splendid thing 
and to have it known. I am sure I should.” 

‘Hf I hear you call it splendid once more. I’ll 


An Ice Carnival 


227 


throw something at you/’ warned Jack. It 
doesn’t make any difference how proud you might 
feel ; it makes me feel disgusted, and I wish you’d 
stop. I hope to goodness I shall not have to 
hear the thing talked about all the years I am 
to be in this place. I’ll go to some other college 
before I’ll allow it.” 

“ She doesn’t mean half she says,” Nan whis- 
pered to Jean. ‘‘ She is all wrought up and 
nervous and tired. You know it always irritates 
her to have anyone talk much about a thing in 
which she has been concerned. Just drop the 
subject for the present.” 

Though this was hard for Jean to do, she 
realized the worth of Nan’s counsel and spared 
Jack further comment, though it is safe to say 
that the story was widely spread and Jack could 
not escape the consequences. Finally she went 
to Miss Lane and begged that she would stop 
the girls’ talk. I’m sick of the subject,” she 
said, ‘‘ and I don’t want ever to hear of it 
again.” Miss Lane undertsood and promised to 
do what she could, but Jack’s annoyance reached 
a climax when Mollie Kimball’s parents sent 
a handsome chain and pendant. She declared to 
Jean that she would return it at once, then that 
she would throw it in the lake, that it was 
insulting and all that. Finally she flung it to 
Jean saying: “ You may have it, but don’t ever 


228 The Four Corners at College 

wear it when Tm around. I’d about as soon they 
had sent me hand-cuffs.” And wear it she never 
would. Jean refused to take it, but in after 
years when Jack was far away Jean found it 
among discarded things and kept it in loving 
remembrance of brave little Jack. 



I 

1 



CHAPTER XIV 


* A STUDIO RECEPTION 

In spite of Jack’s protests the story of Mollie 
Kimball’s rescue went further than the college 
town, for Jean could not resist writing a detailed 
account to Mr. Pinckney who in turn transmitted 
it to his daughter in California. Mary Lee in- 
corporated it in a letter to Mrs. Kirk while 
Nan made it the principal subject of her weekly 
budget to her mother and Aunt Helen. In con- 
sequence of all this Jack one day received a 
lengthy and enthusiastic epistle from Carter 
Barnwell, her ‘‘ old pal ” as he signed himself. 
Jack had not been writing to Carter very often 
during this past year. Too many other things 
occupied her, and Jack was liable to permit the 
present moment to thrust aside anything relating 
to the past. Carter’s last report from California 
lay still unanswered and when Jack found this 
second letter in the mail she remarked to Jean. 
“ Well, what is Carter writing again for, I 
wonder.” 

“ Don’t you like to hear from Carter ? ” asked 
Jean in surprise. 


232 The Four Corners at College 

Oh, yes, of course, but if it is to remind 
me that I already owe him a letter I don’t like 
it.” 

She read the pages, occasionally smiling but 
oftener frowning. Finally she threw down the 
sheets exclaiming : ‘‘ It’s a little too much when 

Carter gets to using soft soap.” 

“Why, what do you mean?” exclaimed Jean 
in surprise. 

“ He’s heard of that tiresome affair on Collins’ 
Pond.” 

“ Well, what of that? He was bound to hear 
some time.” 

“ I don’t see why. Of course you all have 
been writing about it to Mr. St. Nick and Miss 
Dolores.” 

“Of course we wrote,” returned Jean vir- 
tuously. “ It would have been unkind not to 
tell such an interesting incident.” 

“ Well,” said Jack with a sigh, “ I suppose I 
have got to write to Carter.” 

“ I wish I had someone as nice as Carter to 
write to,” remarked Jean plaintively. 

“ You may write to him,” said Jack. “ Here, 
answer this letter.” 

“ Oh, Jack, you are so silly. I didn’t say I 
wanted to write to Carter ; I said I wished I had 
someone as nice as he to write to.” 

“Well, I am sure there are plenty of others 


A Studio Reception 233 

just as nice. What is the matter with Dr. Paul, 
or Ran or Ashby? ” 

But none of them would care a bit to write 
to me,” confessed Jean. Dr. Paul writes to 
Jo every chance he gets. Ran writes to Nan and 
Ashby to Effie, so where am I ? ” 

“ Right here, my poppet. Your good times 
are coming. ‘ My love is but a lassie yet.’ I 
wish — ” 

‘‘ What? ” asked Jean as Jack did not go on. 

“ Oh, never mind, only I sometimes wish Cart 
were not quite so grown up, that’s all. Come, 
we must get ready if we are going to that re- 
ception at the Techne House. I am glad there is 
something we can go to that Nan and Mary 
Lee have a share in.” 

This reception at the Techne House was quite 
an important affair, for here were shown the orig- 
inals of such programmes, sketches or posters as 
were used during the year, with other more 
serious work. This fraternity house was one of 
the handsomest of all and the girls naturally took 
a pride in it. On this occasion music was a 
feature — “ a promenade concert combined with 
an art exhibition,” Nan described. As the So- 
ciety’s aim was to study art in a broad sense, 
Nan, as a student of music and literature, was 
one of the foremost members, and one of those 
delegated to receive. 


234 The Four Corners at College 

She turned her little sisters over to Mary Lee, 
as soon as she had welcomed them, and then gave 
her attention to others who were arriving. On 
this special day Daniella came over from the 
Wadsworth, with Hartley in company; Rob 
Powell and John Townsend arrived from Yale; 
Abby Russell from Boston; so Nan had her hands 
full. But she managed skillfully, feeling that 
neither Daniella nor Hartley would miss her if 
left to themselves, that John would be quite satis- 
fied with Jo’s society and that Abby would be 
quite pleased to have the escort of the other Yale 
Senior. What Rob himself might feel she did 
not ask,' but if he would come when he knew 
she must be busy it was his own lookout. 

The rooms were charmingly decorated, the 
music not to be despised, and the pictures hung 
so as to display them to the best advantage, 
therefore many were attracted to the house, but at 
last there was a lull in the arrivals and Nan had 
a chance to give some time to her friends. She 
saw Rob’s eyes follow Daniella admiringly, and 
she made a point of presenting him, laughing 
to see Hartley’s serious scowl. ‘‘ He needn’t 
think he can monopolize anything as beautiful as 
Danny,” Nan whispered to Mary Lee. “ Isn’t 
her new hat becoming? and what a difference a 
good dressmaker can make in one’s figure. I 
told Dan she ought to go to Effie’s tailor, and 


A Studio Reception 235 

you see she must have taken my advice, for she 
looks better than I ever saw her. Do you see 
how John Townsend is devoting himself to Jo? ” 

“ He’d better be looking some other way,” re- 
turned Mary Lee, ** for we all know where Jo’s 
heart is.” 

By this time Abby had met some friends and 
concluded to return with them to Boston, though 
the girls begged her to stay and have supper 
with them. The crowd was thinning out and 
still their Yale friends lingered. Jo and her 
companion joined Daniella and Hartley and the 
four had found a corner where they could rest. 
Rob came up to where Nan and Mary Lee were 
standing. “ Can’t we make up a party to have 
supper at the Inn?” he asked. suppose it 
wouldn’t be impossible to find a chaperon. John 
and I would like to have the whole crowd in- 
cluding Miss Scott and her friend. Funny, John 
never noticed Miss Scott till about half an hour 
ago. ‘ Great Scott,’ he said, ‘ but isn’t she a 
peach? Who is it?’ ‘Great Scott she is,’ said 
I. ‘ Why can’t we have her to the Senior 
dance ? ’ he asked, and so I ask you ? Is Glenn 
her single steady, and would there be trouble if 
she were asked? I mean if John asked her, for 
I am counting on your company, Miss Nan.” 

“ Better ask Miss Scott yourself,” returned 
Nan calmly. 


236 The Four Corners at College 

“ John has bespoken her/’ replied Rob with a 
close scanning of Nan’s face, “ that is, if you 
think he may ask/’ 

I see no reason why he may not,” Nan an- 
swered. So far as I know, Miss Scott is not 
appropriated.” 

I’ll tell John that. Will you all go to sup- 
per with us, and will you ask Miss Scott to 
be one of the number? Her friend, too, of 
course. Miss Jo, yourself and your sister. I hope 
you won’t get too severe a chaperon, if there is 
any choice.” And Nan went off to gather the 
party together. The twins were due at Rayner 
Hall and had gone some time before, pleased at 
having met some of their old friends and feeling 
quite grown up because Hartley had presented 
two Harvard youths who walked home with 
them. 

Though Daniella demurred about remaining, 
Nan and Mary Lee persuaded her to join the 
party, themselves calling up Miss Barnes to say 
she was with them and would be returned in 
due time. That matter set right. Nan started in 
search of a chaperon among the faculty. Her 
choice lay between three. I’ll get Miss Jenifer 
if I can,” she said, “ for she is sure to be jolly, 
and if I can’t get her. I’ll try Miss Morris; she 
can be jolly if she will; and if I must I will try 
Miss Hutchinson who couldn’t be jolly if she 


A Studio Reception 237 

tried, but who doesn’t mind, in fact rather likes, 
others to be.” As it turned out the second was 
the only one available, and in a crowd which 
included Jo, Robin and John, it would have been 
difficult for her to withstand a temptation to be 
jolly. 

John managed to be so seated that he was be- 
tween Daniella and Jo, Rob came next with Nan 
on the other side. Hartley occupied a place be- 
tween Daniella and Mary Lee, and Miss Morris 
sat with a Corner girl each side. Of the en- 
tire party probably Hartley enjoyed himself the 
least, though it cannot be said that any one of 
them was quite satisfied, unless it were Miss 
Morris. 

Jo, though not caring greatly for John, 
felt piqued that he should so openly show his 
admiration for Daniella. Nan, though not in 
love with Rob, wondered why he addressed him- 
self more frequently to Jo than to herself. Dan- 
iella was troubled that Hartley showed him- 
self so distinctly glum. Mary Lee was annoyed 
that her efiforts to make Hartley talk met with 
so little response, while Rob could not forget 
that Nan had suggested that he ask Daniella to 
the dance when she knew that he expected her 
to go with him. Of the entire party, Miss Morris 
had no grievance and thoroughly enjoyed the 
excellent supper served them, not in the least real- 


238 The Four Corners at College 

izing the disquiet that laughter and merriment 
hid. 

Jo, not to show her pique, was at her wittiest 
and was ably abetted by Rob who was de- 
termined he would not show the hurt he felt. 
Even Hartley unbent at some of the nonsense 
that was uttered, and at the last actually offered 
some witticisms of his own. Nevertheless after 
the supper was over he reminded Daniella with 
a good deal of dignity that they must leave if 
she would reach the Wadsworth school at a 
reasonable hour, and she agreed with him, to 
John’s discomfiture. 

“ I’d like to cut out that grouchy youth,’’ he 
said to Nan. Can’t a man look at a pretty girl 
without being treated like an interloper. He’d 
better be a Turk at once. It wasn’t his place to 
suggest going if she had wanted to stay till 
midnight. Why couldn’t they have taken the 
next train? We were just beginning to get ac- 
quainted.” 

“ They really had to go, I suppose,” replied 
Nan, though feeling he was right in the main. 
“ Daniella is at school, you know, and though 
she has certain privileges, being more or less a 
parlor boarder, she cannot stretch them too far.” 

“ Well, you’ll see to it that she comes to the 
Senior dance, I hope. She’ll come if you do, 
won’t she?” 


A Studio Reception 239 

I don’t know that I shall be there myself,” 
returned Nan calmly, this partly to punish John 
for his desertion of Jo, and partly to punish 
Rob — for what ? He didn’t know. 

He had heard the remark, however, and later 
reproached her. Jo had gone on with Miss 
Morris, leaving Mary Lee to John’s escort. 

“ I don't see why you ignore the fact that 
I expect you to be my guest at the Senior dance,” 
began Rob. 

“ Oh, do you expect it? ” said Nan with an air 
of surprise. 

You know I do. Nan Corner. Didn’t we 
talk it all over last summer with Rita ? ” 

“ Did we ? So many things have happened 
since then, how can you expect me to remem- 
ber?” 

Do you mean you won’t go with me ? ” asked 
Rob flatly. 

“ I haven’t said so, have I ? ” 

You have suggested such a possibility. 
Will you go or will you not?” 

Dear me, must I decide this minute ? I shall 
have to find out what is going on here. It may 
not be possible. Some of our own college dates 
may conflict. I shall have to let you know 
later.” And with this Rob had to be satisfied. 

Meanwhile Daniella and Hartley were sitting 
stiffly side by side in the car making polite, per- 


240 The Four Corners at College 

functory remarks to one another, but at last 
Hartley could nurse his grievance no longer with- 
out giving voice to it. I see you prefer blue 
to crimson,” he remarked. 

Dan perfectly understood this allusion to the 
Yale and Harvard colors, but she was not with- 
out spirit, quiet as she was. I don’t know 
that I have ever expressed any opinion on the 
subject,” she replied with distinct coldness, “ cer- 
tainly not to you,” she added. 

Hartley felt his spirits sink still lower. He 
had looked forward to this little trip with such 
joy, and how had it ended? He longed to ask 
Daniella a hundred questions, but he did not 
dare, while she was no whit less unhappy, and 
as silent as he, so they parted at Miss Barnes’s 
door with no more than a polite farewell. 

There was no lack of conversation in the Cor- 
ners’ room that night, for the two were closeted 
with Jo and were discussing with much freedom 
the events of the afternoon and evening. If 
I hadn’t been so much amused at the sight of 
Hartley’s face, and if it had been any other 
girl than dear old Danny, I should have been as 
mad as hops,” said Jo frankly. “ A funeral 
would be a cheerful sight compared to Hart’s ex- 
pression, and Dan was disgruntled, too, only she 
isn’t the kind to wear her heart on her sleeve.” 

It wasn’t a bit nice of Hart to act so,” de- 


A Studio Reception 241 

dared Mary Lee. “ It wasn't kind to Danny. 
His dictating to her when they should go placed 
her in a very disagreeable position.” 

“ If I had been in her place,” said Nan, “I 
wouldn’t have gone a step, I would have said 
that I was not ready, and have let him make 
the best of it.” 

“ That is what she should have done,” agreed 
Jo. ‘‘ She is a beauty and no mistake, but John 
needn’t have been so bowled over that he had to 
turn his back on me. I’m not jealous; don’t be- 
lieve that for a moment, but no girl likes to 
be rushed one minute and the next have her best 
young man drop her without any visible reason. 
I’ll pay him up, the scalawag. Do you believe 
Dan will go to the Senior dance. Nan? ” 

“ Not if Hartley can help it. It depends upon 
that largely I should say. If Dan wants to show 
her independence and that she is not to be brow- 
beaten she will go. She and Hart may make it 
up before then, probably will, and she’ll refuse 
from choice.” 

‘‘ You’re going, of course. Nan.” 

I haven’t said so,” returned Nan with a toss 
of her chin. 

'' Look here,” Jo said, ‘‘ what’s the matter 
with you and Rob?” 

“ Nothing.” 

Tell that to the marines. I saw him steal 


242 The Four Corners at College 

weird questioning glances at you all the even- 
ing. What’s he been doing?” 

Nothing.” 

Jo laughed. “ Some sort of adverse wave 
seems to have struck us all. Is dear innocent 
Danny the one who has thrown the apple of dis- 
cord? It seems funny. You’re not jealous, 
Nan?” 

Of course not.” 

‘‘ Why are you at outs with Rob ? ” 

‘‘ I don’t know. On general principles, I sus- 
pect.” 

‘‘ The man is honestly in love with you ; there 
isn’t a doubt of it.” 

‘‘Think so?” returned Nan indifferently. 
Then to change the subject. “ I wonder if 
Hartley and Dan are really engaged.” 

“ No, I am sure they are not,” Mary Lee an- 
swered. “ Dan has some notion about its being 
her duty not to allow any love-making while she 
is at school. She says it wouldn’t be fair to Mr. 
Scott for her to think of anything like that, and 
that anyone who wants to court her will have 
to wait till she is under her father’s eye. She 
is right honorable and fair, Danny is, and has 
mighty nice notions about it all, so I’m sure 
she’s not going to allow Hartley to make love to 
her, however much he may want to, or how- 
ever much she may like him.” 


A Studio Reception 243 

Lots of girls here are engaged/’ remarked 
Jo, ‘‘ and I don’t see any reason why they 
shouldn’t be.” 

So I told Dan, but she said the cases were 
quite different. Those girls, she argued, were 
with their parents or in their own homes more or 
less, so that when anyone paid them serious at- 
tention it was known to the family, that probably 
the parents’ consent had been asked and all that. 
Then she said that her father had spared no ex- 
pense and had allowed her to be separated from 
him all these years, and the least she could do was 
to return to him absolutely free. Anyone can see 
that she likes Hartley mighty well, but I am very 
sure she doesn’t mean to encourage him unduly, 
and that he must take his chances with any 
other who may happen to come along after she 
returns home.” 

Jo sat thoughtfully looking at the toes of her 
shoes. She’s fine,” she averred, “ but as she 
herself says, her arguments wouldn’t apply in 
every case.” 

Certainly not in yours, Jo dear,” observed 
Nan. 

Jo colored up, then she said quite frankly, 

No, of course not in mine. It would be a 
matter of congratulation to my pater if I were 
to tell him I was engaged, though goodness 
knows, I have been no expense to the family 


244 ‘The Four Corners at College 

since I left the Wadsworth, and I never shall be 
if I can help it.” 

Everyone who knows you well, must know 
that, Josephine dear,” said Nan, beginning to 
divest herself of some of her ornaments. 
“ Please unhook me, one of you, and I’ll return 
the civility.” 

“ When do you expect to see Rob again ? Is 
he staying over till Monday?” asked Jo, busy- 
ing herself with the hooks at the back of Nan’s 
frock. 

‘‘ My child, I canna tell ye,” returned Nan with 
a shrug. 

“ Da ye mean ye canna or ye wull na ? ” asked 
Jo in the same vernacular. 

‘‘ I mean I canna, for I dinna ken,” returned 
Nan. 

“ Well, Nan,” — Jo dropped back into her usual 
form of speech, — I can’t believe that possible. 
You certainly must have treated him very badly 
for him not to have told you.” 

Nan commenced humming a little tune softly 
before she said, ‘‘ I really don’t know, and I 
can’t see wherein I treated him badly. You 
were there most of the time. Did you see any 
signs of abuse? ” 

“ I saw signs which made me aware that 
something had gone wrong, and that he was 
disturbed in some way.” 


A Studio Reception 245 

Perhaps his supper disagreed with him,” re- 
turned Nan flippantly. 

“ You are provoking,” retorted Jo. “ Well, 
don’t tell if you don’t want to.” 

“ There’s nothing to tell. I simply remarked 
to him that I couldn’t be sure of going to the 
Senior dance, which is perfectly true, but it 
seemed to upset him in some irrational way.” 

Of course that explains it,” decided Jo. 
“ You are a heartless minx.” 

Same to you, miss. I’d better be a heart- 
less minx than a disloyal Junior, and stay away 
from some of my own class functions. It seems 
to me. Miss Keyes, that you are extraordinarily 
keen about Master Powell’s state of mind. Why 
is not mine to be considered ? ” 

“ Have you one ? ” 

Which ? Mind or state ? ” 

‘‘ Oh, girls, do stop this meaningless talk,” 
expostulated Mary Lee. I want to go to bed.” 

‘‘ She evidently does not enjoy our brilliant 
repartee. Nan,” said Jo. I’ll go and leave you 
in peace. Thanks, I’m unhooked. Good night, 
ladies. Pleasant dreams.” And Jo made a 
blithe exit which showed well that the evening’s 
occurrences had not affected her spirits. 




* 




I 


i 


if 


I 




4 






I 



CHAPTER XY 


A SECRET RITE 

For days before the last forensics went in, 
the members of the Junior class found it diffi- 
cult to escape the vigilance of the Sophomores, 
for well these latter knew that a great triumph 
would be theirs if they could discover where the 
sacred rite of burning the forensics was to be 
held. A Junior could not innocently wander in 
any direction but the sharp eyes of a Sophomore 
observed her from some point of vantage. If 
two Juniors were seen whispering together, a 
Sophomore would stealthily follow them that she 
might perchance overhear some word which 
would give a clue to the plans so carefully 
guarded. More than one cherished scheme 
had been frustrated because of some prying 
Soph. 

The girls were talking it over one day within 
Jack’s hearing. I am sure they know,” an- 
nounced Jo, ‘‘ for Emily said she heard that Cora 
Summers was up a tree that day we had the 
meeting in the woods.” 

“ Then we shall have to let them believe we 


250 The Four Corners at College 

are going to keep to the arrangements we made 
that day/’ responded Nan, and must make 
some other in order to foil them.” 

‘‘ That’s strategic,” asserted Jo. 

‘‘ What was the plan ? ” inquired Jack. 

‘‘ You don’t suppose we are going to tell you, 
do you ? ” replied Mary Lee. 

“If you aren’t going to carry it out, why not? 
I’m not asking you to tell me what you are really 
going to do, but what you are not,” said Jack 
argumentatively. 

“ Why do you want to know ? ” 

“ I have a reason,” returned Jack mysteriously. 
“ You may be glad some day if you were to tell 
me.” 

“ You’ll not give us away,” said Jo. 

“ No, I promise I’ll be on your side. As if 
I would betray my own sisters,” she added with 
indignation. 

“We may as well tell her since it seems that 
it is no longer the secret we thought it was,” 
said Nan. 

“ Very well, we don’t mind,” agreed the other 
two. 

“ We were going to Orcutt’s Corners in a big 
’bus and then we were going to walk about a 
mile to the woods on the other side of the pond. 
We were to start about ten o’clock in the even- 
ing.” 


A Secret Rite 


251 

Jack nodded wisely. Very well. You 
won’t be sorry you told me, I think.” 

“ Jack loves to be mysterious,” remarked Mary 
Lee. 

“ So do you, it seems,” retorted Jack with 
some warmth. 

“ Well, skip along now,” said Nan. “ We’ve 
got a committee meeting at five and we can’t 
stay here. Here, give us a kiss, old galee, before 
you go.” 

Jack obeyed and took her leave. On her way 
out she met a couple of Sophomores whom she 
knew. Have you any idea where Orcutt’s 
Corners is ? ” she asked innocently. 

The Sophomores glanced at one another. 

Why do you want to know ? ” asked one. 

“ Oh, I overheard some of the Juniors mention 
it and I wondered where it was. Is it a station 
or a house or what ? ” 

It is a little village,” the elder of the 
girls told her. 

‘‘About three miles west of us,” said the 
other. 

“ Oh, then you have to drive there, do you ? 
Does a ’bus run to it ? ” 

“ You have to drive,” said the girls, not able 
to restrain a little chuckle of satisfaction. 

“What’s so mysterious about it? ” asked Jack. 
“ Is it a picnic or something that is going on? ” 


252 The Four Corners at College 

“ What makes you think there is any- 
thing mysterious ? ” asked the younger girl. 

“ People don’t usually whisper about a thing 
unless it is sort of mysterious, do they?” in- 
quired Jack with duplicity. 

‘‘ Well, no, though many times it is not exactly 
a mystery but only a secret. Come along with 
us, Jack. We are going to the village. Come 
and have some ice cream with us.” 

Jack, nothing loth, accepted the invitation with 
alacrity, and enjoyed her ice cream, answering 
the adroit questions put to her as if not in the 
least understanding their drift. In the course 
of the conversation she managed to convey the 
information that her two sisters and Jo Keyes 
were those whom she had heard mention Or- 
cutt’s Corners, a ’bus and a pond, also something 
about getting back late at night. 

She finished her plate of ice cream placidly 
and with the expression of guilelessness that none 
knew better than Jack how to assume. After 
thanking her entertainers, she took her leave, say- 
ing that she must get back to Rayner Hall. No 
sooner was she out of hearing than the Sopho- 
mores hugged one another and fairly chortled 
with glee. 

Wasn’t she easy game? ” they cried. “ Did 
you ever know such luck? She evidently hadn’t 
an idea that we had any ulterior motive in ask- 


A Secret Rite 


2S3 

ing those questions. Let’s get back and tell the 
others.” 

Jack, having done her little part, pursued her 
way, but her look of innocence speedily changed 
to a wise and mirthful expression. '' What 
foxes they thought they were,” she said to her- 
self, but ‘ Bre’r Rabbit, he lay low/ ” 

The next time she saw her sisters she kept 
her own counsels, in spite of their questions as 
to whether her mystery was to be explained. 
Jack shook her head in answer to their ques- 
tions. “ Tar Baby keep on a-sayin’ nuffin',” she 
answered. The girls were too busy to press their 
inquiries any further, though they noticed that 
for the next few days they were not so closely 
watched except in the evening. At that time 
the Sophomores were all eyes and one could take 
no path that she did not come upon one or two 
of them. 

Very early one morning about this time. Nan 
tip-toed over to Mary Lee’s bed. Get up,” 
she whispered. ‘‘ It’s time.” Mary Lee obeyed 
without hesitation. It was quite dark, not ev^en 
the first ray of dawn had begun to creep up 
the sky. The girls felt their way about the room, 
finding their clothes and dressing without more 
than an occasional smothered word. They 
dressed even to their hats and coats, but they 
wore no shoes. These they took in their hands 


254 The Four Corners at College 

as they stealthily opened the door and crept out 
into the corridor, turning the knob with the ut- 
most caution. Groping their way along, they en- 
countered other silent figures, like themselves, 
unshod. One of these ran into them as they 
stole along, but a subdued titter alone followed 
the collision. 

Down the stairs and into the grounds they 
went, joined by others equally silent and cautious. 
Not a foot was shod till they were out of hear- 
ing of any of the sleepers in the various 
dormitories, but then one after another sat down 
in the dim light and drew on her shoes. They 
reached the limits of the grounds and continued 
a short distance further, their number being 
augmented from time to time by some breath- 
less girl. When all had gathered in a closely 
huddled bunch they all moved forward to where 
a trolley car stood in waiting. ‘‘ In with you,^’ 
whispered their leader, and the girls, laughing, 
jostling and still whispering, crowded in. 

Just as the last one found footing on the plat- 
form a group of sleepy, frowsy-headed Soph- 
omores came in sight running desperately. 

Hurry/’ cried the foremost girls sharply to 
the motorman, and a turn of his wheel set the 
car in motion, leaving the staring Sophomores 
to watch it whizzing off into the dim gray of 
the morning. 


A Secret Rite 


2S5 

“ Close shave,” cried the girls. “ Isn’t it great 
that we gave them the slip so beautifully? ” 

I knocked over a chair in my efforts to find 
my coat,” said Emily Taylor, “and I was so 
dreadfully afraid I had wakened a Soph that I 
was scared to death.” 

“ I simply came without my hat,” said an- 
other. “ I couldn’t risk hunting for it.” 

The dawn was beginning to creep up the east 
when the car stopped some miles distant. The 
girls alighted and proceeded toward a piece of 
woods about half a mile away, leaving the car 
in waiting. 

Anyone passing would have heard uncanny and 
weird sounds issuing from the woods a few 
minutes later, and might have wondered what 
strange and untoward performance was going on. 
He would probably have been greatly surprised 
when he came upon sentries in the persons of 
young women guarding the deep recesses of a 
forest enclosure, and would have been quite as 
surprised when he saw a body of young and fair 
maidens issuing forth to tramp down the road 
and board the waiting car. 

“ Look at Mary Lee Corner,” cried Madge 
Wright when the daylight gave them opportunity 
to see one another clearly, “ she has on one tan 
stocking and one black one.” 

“ You needn’t talk,” returned Mary Lee, 


2^6 The Four Corners at College 

though somewhat perturbed by the laugh which 
went up, “ you have your skirt on wrong side 
out” 

When one has to dress in the pitch dark it 
is a wonder that any of her clothing matches,’’ 
said Madge. I think we are quite a respectable 
looking crowd, considering.’’ 

The sun was lighting up tree tops and shining 
lake when they returned in triumph to give 
superior smiles to the vanquished Sophomores. 
The burning of the forensics had never been per- 
formed with greater secrecy and no one had the 
faintest idea what they owed to Jack Corner. 

As the procession of white-hooded maidens in 
ghostly draperies wound around the campus, their 
wind-blown torches fitting accessories to the 
lugubrious Latin dirge they sang, Jack’s two 
Sophomore friends whispered one to the other, 
“ I believe that Jack Corner is a perfect fraud, 
and that they just put her up to fooling us.” 

She did it mighty well, then,” returned the 
other, watching the last white-clad figure disap- 
pear behind the trees. 

Jack finally divulged her secret, and her ac- 
count of it sent the three girls into shrieks of 
laughter. ‘‘ If I could only have been a fly on 
the wall,” said Jo. You are a perfect genius. 
Jack.” 

She’s a jolly good fellow,” declared Nan. 


A Secret Rite 


257 

What can I give you, Jack? It is yours even 
unto the half of my kingdom/' 

“ I think I was amply paid by the success of 
my stratagem, but I wouldn't mind a plate of 
ice cream, thank you." 

So the girls bore her off and supplied the 
treat, sending her off loaded with candies and 
other ‘‘ unwholesome stuff," as Nan called it. 
Later on the story got around and it may be stated 
that one might expect lively times ahead for 
Jack if she entered college before the victims of 
her ruse passed out. 

Daniella did not go to the Senior dance at 
Yale, and Jo took her revenge upon John Town- 
send by making him believe up to the last mo- 
ment that Daniella might accept, for she had 
taken Daniella into her confidence and the two 
agreed upon a certain course. When it was too 
late Daniella sent the young man a telegram 
saying that it would be impossible for her to at- 
tend. Later Jo herself appeared as the guest of 
another Senior. In vain did John struggle to re- 
turn to his former allegiance. Jo flouted him 
openly and at last he was obliged to retire from 
the field. 

It served him quite right," said Jo. “ No 
one can expect to sit on two chairs without 
danger of falling between the two. He needed 
the lesson and he got it." 


258 The Four Corners at College 

As for Nan she yielded to Rita’s entreaties if 
not to Rob’s, and made up her mind at the last 
moment to go. Probably she had no reasonable 
excuse to give to Rita, whatever unreasonable 
one she might have felt ready to offer to Rob. 
At all events she had a good time and was happy 
in persuading Rita to return with her to stay 
a few days. 

Of all the many revels which took place at 
Bettersley, that one of Tree Day was not less en- 
joyed than the merry Maying time, for caps and 
gowns, class colors, motley costumes, all com- 
bined to make the great procession a spectacular 
one which became a regular pageant as feature 
after feature was added. It broke up with cheers 
new and old, then there was dancing, speech- 
making and a frantic dash for the new tree. At 
the last all came to a sweet conclusion in an even- 
ing serenade. 

“ It is well we have something pleasant to look 
forward to besides exams,” said Jo, who, with 
arms piled up with books, met Mary Lee in the 
corridor a day or two after the Tree Day frolic. 
‘‘ If I flunk ril simply throw up the sponge. It 
isn’t in the nature of Jospehine Keyes to give up 
any fun that is going. Who could be a greasy 
grind with all there is in the air? I’ve been 
tutoring to-day till I’m deaf, dumb, blind, insane 
and idiotic, and now I’ve got to go and cram 


A Secret Rite 


259 


instead of studying up my part for the Shakes- 
peare play. Do you feel as if you would pull 
through, Mary Lee?'" 

‘‘ I hope so/' was the response given rather 
dubiously. ** Fve worked pretty hard this year, 
and haven't done more than a reasonable amount 
outside. Nan’s play was the only one in which 
I took part and the character was so slight that 
I didn't have to work over it.” 

But you coached the whole cast.” 

Well, yes, of course, but that took only time 
and not much brain. I’ve gone into hockey and 
basket ball somewhat diligently, but I've not be- 
gun to do what you and Nan have.” 

How’s old Nan, and what is she doing? ” 

“ She’s sitting with her head tied up and a 
stack of books everywhere surrounding her ex- 
cept where she has made room for a bottle of 
Apollinaris water. She says the fizz helps the 
dryness of her employment. I don’t feel any 
too sure of myself, but I can't work in that 
desperate sort of way.” 

‘‘ Wl^ere are you going now ? ” 

Out to play hockey for awhile. I’ve studied 
till I can’t tell one subject from another, and 
I’ve copied notes till my thumb waggles. I need 
to employ another set of muscles.” 

Well, good-by to you, then. I envy you the 
freshness of the fairness outside, but I’ve got to 


260 The Four Corners at College 

work.” She toiled on and Mary Lee heard the 
books fall with a thud on the table as Jo entered 
her room. 

‘‘ Poor old Jo,” soliloquized Mary Lee, “ I 
hope she won’t flunk.” 

And flunk she did not in spite of all that pulled 
her this way and that, and later on in the day 
she bobbed up in gay spirits ready for the dress 
rehearsal of the Shakespeare play. 

Neither did the Corners fail to pass their exami- 
nations, and it was with a cheer of relief that 
they welcomed the hour which found them freed 
from any more responsibility in that direction. 
“ Only one more year and then — ” cried Nan. 

‘‘And then?” queried Mary Lee suddenly 
looking sober. 

“ Then anything we choose. We are going to 
settle all that by and by. Of course the twins 
expect to have four more years of it, if it is so de- 
cided. Mother is doubtful whether Jean can 
stand the grind. The child isn’t strong, you 
know, but she is determined to try one year. 
She will keep up if she possibly can, for it would 
be hard to separate those twinnies. At all 
events the first thing is a good old summer at 
home. Never mind, Mary Lee, don’t think 
about that,” for her sister looked suddenly sober. 
“ It will be good to have mother and Aunt Helen 
and all of them.” 


A Secret Rite 


261 

“ Except Phil,” returned Mary Lee gravely. 

I know, I know, and we shall miss him very, 
very much. Does it seem to you, Mary Lee, 
as if it would be better to make other plans for 
the summer? It isn’t too late, you know.” 

“ No, I am going to try to stand it. For 
many reasons I would rather be at home than 
anywhere. I think Phil would like me to be. 
Cousin May begs that I will come and so does 
Cousin Tom.” 

Dear old girl, we will do our best to keep 
you cheered up,” responded Nan. ‘‘ You know 
Aunt Helen can understand and so can mother.” 

“ Yes, they can,” her sister agreed. “ Their 
letters have been worth everything to me, for 
they have gone through it all. Last summer 
Aunt Helen was such a comfort. She always 
knew the right thing to say at the right time. 
Dear Aunt Helen, I never loved her so much 
as I have learned to do since this loss came. 
You and she were always such comrades and 
had so much in common, that I never felt I was 
as near to her as you.” 

“ Have you always thought that, Mary Lee ? 
that she always cared more for me? I don’t 
think she does.” 

“ I am sure she did at first, and it was per- 
fectly natural that she should. I used to resent 
it a little, but I feel quite different now. You 


262 The Four Corners at College 

and I, too, Nan, have grown closer together 
these last years/’ 

This serious talk was interrupted by the in- 
rush of a crowd of girls clamoring. “ Come 
along, come along. Don’t waste your time in- 
doors. Work is done, Play’s begun. Despoil 
your larder. Bring along your viands. We are 
going on a picnic to celebrate. Come along, 
Come along ! ” So, gathering up whatever might 
serve for a feast, they followed the merrymak- 
ers. 


CHAPTER XVI 
JO AND HER PRIZES 



•y 


t 


■V t 


' i . 


• I y 


M y ■ 






, / 




I I ■ 

’'vyr^yrl.' ' 


■*' V'. V' / . . y . ;■ -■ 





f 


/ 


N 

I 


» , 


( 

I t 


1 






# • 


' ' ' 4 s'*'. 

I - ii ••' j I j\ 


\ 


4 


• , 


1 



i 

1 


1 

\ 


A 

I 


i 
' i 


/ 

♦ 






CHAPTER XVI 


JO AND HER PRIZES 

The moment came when it was an assured 
fact that the tassels of the Juniors’ caps could 
be swung into position to indicate that they had 
arrived at the dignity of Seniors. Junior work 
was over except so much as might be connected 
with concert, play, or those final things which 
meant even less responsibility. 

From time to time both Nan and Jo had con- 
tributed to the college paper, The Scroll, the for- 
mer occasionally, the latter more frequently. 
Even Mary Lee had sent in some little squibs 
which had found their place in the paper. Some 
time before the close of the year it was an- 
nounced that a former editor of the paper had 
offered a prize of one hundred dollars for the 
best article written for the paper by an under- 
graduate, and for this Jo secretly worked with 
the ardent hope that she might be the winner. 
She said very little about it, mainly because she 
was so anxious, for it would go a long way to- 
ward helping her through the expenses of the 
coming year. She felt that Nan would be her 


266 The Four Corners at College 

most dangerous rival, if so be that Nan were to 
compete, but Nan had not said anything about 
it, and Jo was consumed with anxious fears. 
Not for worlds would she have this friendly rival 
know how she felt about it, but she much wanted 
to find out how the matter stood, and one day 
she put the question to the test. 

Are you competing for the prize offered by 
The Scroll?^' she asked Nan cautiously. 

I may send in something,’’ said Nan care- 
lessly. '' I haven’t really thought much about 
it; there have been so many other things on hand. 
When is the last day? ” 

“ Everything must be in before to-morrow,” 
Jo told her. 

‘‘ Then I must be seeing about it,” Nan re- 
joined. ‘‘ Did you enter anything, Jo? ” 

“ Oh, yes. I always rush in, you know, in 
the most cheerful manner, get turned down and 
bob up serenely next time. I’m that kind of an 
idiot, you remember.” She spoke lightly. 

“ It’s a money prize, isn’t it? ” 

‘‘ Yes, I believe so.” 

How much ? ” 

‘‘ A hundred dollars, I heard someone say. 
It is offered by Mrs. Ellison who was a Betters- 
ley girl, and always keeps up her interest in the 
place and especially in the paper.” 

‘‘ Mighty nice of her,” commented Nan. 


Jo and Her Prizes 267 

‘‘ Thank you for reminding me of the date, Jo. 
Must you go ? ” 

‘‘ Yes, I have some odds and ends to see to.’' 

After Jo left. Nan went to her desk and drew 
forth a little sheaf of papers which she began 
looking over. To one she gave an exact scru- 
tiny. It’s much the best,” she said to herself. 

An hour’s work would put it into good shape.” 
She read the article over again carefully, then sat 
thoughtfully gazing at the last sheet. A hun- 
dred dollars,” she murmured ; “ that would mean 
a lot to Jo. Well, my dear, I will eliminate one 
stone from the path of your success.” She 
folded up the papers and thrust them back into 
her desk, and Jo never knew how near she came 
to being pitted against this formidable rival. 

She met Nan the next day with the question. 
Well, did you send in your article ? Polls are 
closed, you remember.” 

“ Oh, dear me, so they are,” replied Nan with 
well assumed dismay. “ Well, it’s too late now. 
If I were going to compete I should have at- 
tended to it sooner. Serves me right for being 
such a Polly Procrastinator.” And she went off 
leaving Jo trying very hard to frown down her 
look of relief. 

Therefore it came about that the prize did go 
to Jo, but it may be safely said that she would 
scarcely have won it if Nan had submitted the 


268 The Four Corners at College 

paper which was really a better piece of work 
than Jo’s. It had been done in a moment of in- 
spiration and Nan herself recognized its origi- 
nality. However no one was more pleased than 
she when Jo, pale and trembling with joy, came 
to her gasping, ‘‘Oh, Nan, it’s mine! I’ve won 
the prize! A whole hundred dollars! Isn’t it 
wonderful? I’m fairly weak from excitement.” 

Mary Lee, who had entered with her, lent her 
voice to the glad “Hurrah!” that Nan uttered. 
“ Isn’t it fine? ” she said. “ Good old Jo. I am 
proud to know you, pard. I’m as pleased as 
if it had happened to myself; more so in fact.” 

“ Let’s drink her health in sparkling lemon- 
ade,” said Nan. “ I’m sure there are lemons in 
the box. I’ll get them and we’ll have an orgy. 
All the lemonade we can drink, and — let me 
see — one, two, three, four cakes, or cookies as 
they call them up this way. Jo shall have two 
for her share. Sit down, lady, and I’ll have the 
libation ready very soon.” She busied herself 
with the lemons and sugar, presently bringing the 
filled glasses. “ Here’s to our prize winner,” 
she said, “ gentle and kind, will drive in either 
single or double harness, took the blue ribbon 
at the last fair.” 

“ Will eat from your hand,” put in Mary 
Lee, offering Jo a cake. 

“ Answers to the name of Jo,” interposed that 


Jo and Her Prizes 269 

person. ‘‘ Thanks, kind friends, words on this 
occasion would fail to express what I feel. In 
fact the best appreciation I can show of your 
kindness is to show off my tricks.” She took 
a bite from the cake and a draught from her 
glass. 

Their ‘‘ orgy ” was interrupted by a voice at 
the door calling: ‘‘Letters!” 

Mary Lee went to open. “ Two for you Cor- 
ners,” said the voice. “ One for Jo Keyes. 
Where is she ? ” 

“ In here.” 

“ Oh, then you can hand it over. Mail’s just 
in and I thought I would bring these along,” 
the voice continued. 

“ Won’t you come in ? ” 

“No, thanks. I’ve a most seductive lot of 
mail for myself, and must go and examine it.” 

Mary Lee brought in the letters, handing Jo 
one with a Virginia postmark. “ Mine’s from 
mother,” she announced. “ She and Aunt 
Helen are already at home, then. Whom is 
yours from. Nan? ” 

“ Charlotte Loring. Probably wants me to 
come down to see her graduated, but I can’t 
go. Anything special, Jo?” For Jo had 
given her a sudden quick look as she eagerly 
folded the sheet she had received and had read 
rapidly. 


270 The Four Corners at College 

No — only ■ — yes, Dr. Paul is coming up for 
the Shakespeare play.” 

That’s good.” Nan uttered the words 
cordially. He has been confined so very closely 
at home since his mother’s death, that I should 
think he would need a change. Is he going to 
stay any length of time, Jo? ” 

He says he will stay and go back with us, 
if we are going on directly after Commence- 
ment. His father is mighty good to look after 
all the patients, isn’t he? Dr. Paul says there is 
not much illness just now and no very serious 
cases, so he can get away better than he might 
be able to do later when his father is to be ab- 
sent for a couple of months.” 

‘‘ Poor old Dr. Woods, he must be very 
lonely,” remarked Mary Lee wistfully. ‘‘ It 
was a terrible blow to him to lose his wife ; they 
were always such a devoted pair. I am glad 
he is going to take a trip, but it will leave Dr. 
Paul all by himself.” 

“ Not if Jo is with us,” remarked Nan with 
a smile. 

Oh, Nan,” Jo protested feebly, ‘‘ I don’t 
think that will make any great difference.” 

“ Don’t you ? I do. I think it will make all 
the difference in the world.” 

It is almost too much good news to come 
to me in one day,” declared Jo presently. 


271 


Jo and Her Prizes 

‘‘You must get used to good news, my 
friend,” observed Nan. “ You have not had any 
too much of it, and it is time some should be 
coming to you.” 

“ What are you going to do with your prize 
money, Jo?” asked Mary Lee. 

“ I ought to save it for next year, though I 
am dying to get some pretty dikes with some of 
it.” 

“ I’ll sell you everything I own for a hundred 
dollars,” laughed Mary Lee. 

“ Sorry I can’t take you up, for that is cer- 
tainly a bargain.” 

“ Well, if you can’t take me up on that you can 
borrow all my pretties that you want to. You 
must look your very best for the doctor, you 
know.” 

This temptation Jo was not able to withstand, 
and did look her best when the doctor arrived 
a few days later. Joy adds much to beauty and 
Jo was radiantly happy. “ The doctor had eyes 
for no one else,” Nan told her with pretended 
jealousy. 

“ You don’t really mind, do you. Nan? ” asked 
Jo anxiously. 

“ You dear old goose,” cried Nan hugging 
her. “ I’m pleased beyond measure. I think it 
should be my privilege to hear the news that you 
are sure to have. Even though Mary Lee is 


272 The Four Corners at College 

your chosen chum you must promise to tell me 
first." 

Jo blushed, stammered, gave a little quick sigh. 
“Oh, Nan, if there is any news such as you 
mean, I promise to tell you first, but I can’t be- 
lieve there will be any." 

However, as Nan watched her walk off down 
the shadowy paths with the doctor that even- 
ing, she felt it would not be long before Jo did 
have something to tell. 

“I am very glad you all are going to spend 
your summer down home," began the doctor. 
“ I should be pretty lonely, with father away and 
none of you there." 

“ But you have hosts of friends," Jo reminded 
him. 

“ That is true in a sense, but one always does 
select a chosen few who seem nearer and dearer 
than the rest, a few whose sympathy is always the 
most precious. You have been a great comfort 
to me these last months when the house has 
seemed so empty. I looked for your letters to 
give me strength to go on with my daily duties." 

“ Did you ? I can’t tell you how happy that 
makes me. I did so want to comfort you," Jo 
told him, “ though I felt that no one really 
could." 

“ It wasn’t the first time you had given me 
courage either," the doctor went on. “ You 


273 


Jo and Her Prizes 

have been the sweetest little friend a man could 
desire, and Jo, dear Jo, I have come up to ask you 
to be more than a mere friend. I want you for 
my wife.’' 

The fluttering of Jo’s heart allowed of no re- 
ply. 

“ I know,” — the doctor waited a moment be- 
fore he continued, — that you probably believe 
I gave all my heart to Nan, and it would be 
foolish to pretend that I was not very fond of 
her, for you know all about it; but from that 
very hour when you came to me so unselfishly, 
so tenderly and offered me your sweet girlish 
sympathy I think I began to realize the value 
of such a heart as yours. From that hour till 
now my love has grown day by day. So that 
it has come to be so great, Jo dear, that I can- 
not imagine life worth living without you. ' Nan 
is a dear friend and I hope always will be, but 
my love for you is quite a different thing from 
my feeling for her. Will you take this love, 
Jo? and say that you will be my dear and true 
wife? ” 

Yes,” whispered Jo, “ for — ” she paused. 

‘‘ Please say it.” He bent his head to hear. 

‘‘ I love you. I loved you always.” 

From the first?” 

‘‘ From the first. Before that time in Boston, 
I am sure, though I didn’t realize it.” 


274 The Four Corners at College 

'' Then, my darling girl, I am happier than 
I deserve to be. Must you come back to college 
next year? Are you going to keep me waiting 
a whole year for my wife? I need you, dear, 
and when I say that I hope you won’t think I 
am selfish. Perhaps I am selfish to want you 
soon. I am ten years older than you, Jo, and 
perhaps I ought not to expect you to leave all 
those things that girls love, in order to brighten 
my home. You know a doctor’s wife has not 
a very easy time, for if her sympathies are keen 
they make her suffer every day of her life. She 
has many a time to step aside for others. She 
has cares and disappointments not given other 
women to endure. She must trust her husband 
utterly, and must share with him care and dis- 
tress and even censure. Is it too much to ask 
you to accept all this ? ” 

‘‘ No,” replied Jo firmly. “ I am willing to 
accept it all; and, more, I shall rejoice to be of 
use, to share your cares and to do my part. I 
trust you utterly.” 

‘‘ My blessed girl. I was sure you would, 
though I wanted to hear it from your own lips. 
I knew long ago what a dear, capable, whole- 
hearted woman you would make.” 

Even when I was silly and heedless? ” 

Even when you were a little undeveloped 
schoolgirl.” 


275 


Jo and Her Prizes 

They talked on, for a while continuing their 
walk under the trees that bordered the lake, and 
then sitting down in a quiet corner to listen to 
the lapping of the water, the rustling of the 
trees, and the gay laughter and song which once 
in a while floated up from some group of stu- 
dents. 

Nan and Mary Lee were in bed when Jo 
tapped at their door, but Nan got up and went 
to open. The bright moonlight streamed into 
the room. ‘‘Don’t make any light,” said Jo; 
“ it is quite light enough.” She put her arms 
around Nan and whispered, “ IVe come to tell 
you, to keep my promise. Oh, Nan, it is true. 
I can’t believe that anyone could be so happy.” 

“ You dear old thing,” said Nan, returning 
the hug. “ I am so glad, so very glad. Come 
over here and tell me all about it.” 

Mary Lee lifted her head from the pillow. 
“ Who is that? ” she asked. 

“ It’s To,” Nan told her. “ May she come, 
too, Jo?” 

“Of course. Come over, Mary Lee.” 

The three sat side by side on the divan while 
Jo revealed her secret. “ Oh, Mary Lee,” she 
said, “I am engaged. Isn’t it wonderful? It 
is all like a dream, but I am really engaged to 
Dr. Paul.” 

Mary Lee gave her a squeeze. “ Bless you. 


276 The Four Corners at College 

my children, bless you a thousand times. Oh, 
Jo, this is the best piece of news Tve heard for 
many a day ! ” 

“ He was so dear,” Jo went on rapturously. 
“ I know he must miss his mother dreadfully. 
He said I had been such a comfort to him. 
Wasn’t that lovely? I did so long to be. Of 
course I realize that it would be much better for 
him to have me there to make a home for him 
and dear old Dr. Woods, but — . Do you think 
it would be dreadful for me not to come back 
to college next year, but to be married instead? ” 
It would be exactly the right thing,” decided 
Nan. “ Then you wouldn’t have to struggle and 
contrive and worry over your future. Of 
course that is a very practical view of it, but 
on the other hand I am sure it would be untold 
satisfaction to both Dr. Paul and his father to 
have you there.” 

‘‘ And oh, Jo,” exclaimed Mary Lee, “ you 
could be married from our house, and we’d all 
be there to help you get ready. We’d get in 
Miss Hackett to sew, and oh, Jo, it would be 
just the very best thing!” 

“But what would my family say?” Jo asked 
a little wistfully. 

“ What do you think they would say ? In 
the first place it would be much more expensive 
for everyone if that long trip to Salt Lake City 


277 


Jo and Her Prizes 

had to be made. All your friends are in the 
East, you see. Then too it would mean a lot of 
fuss and feathers for your stepmother, and she 
would be glad to be rid of all that.’’ 

Well, I will talk to Aunt Kit about it and we 
can see what she thinks.” 

‘‘ You can take your hundred dollars and what 
you have saved for next year, too, and it would 
go a long away toward buying your wedding out- 
fit,” Nan suggested. “ Then after all, you will 
be able to spend it in dikes just as you wished.” 

‘‘ Fd better take up Mary Lee’s offer,” said 
Jo laughing, and buy her out.” 

Oh, but you - will want new things,” said 
Mary Lee, who saw only the practical side of 
the joke, and her remark brought a burst of 
laughter from the other two. 

Won’t mother and Aunt Helen be pleased ? ” 
said Nan. I am sure they will insist that you 
be married from our house. We should love a 
wedding, Jo.” 

‘‘ It would be lovely to be married there,” she 
returned, and yet — somehow I want my 
father.” 

‘‘Of course, you do, Jo dear,” agreed Mary 
Lee, “ and of course we’d love to have him come 
right to us, and your Aunt Kitty, too. You 
know the old house is very elastic, for there is 
the wing, when all else is filled up, then Cousin 


278 The Four Corners at College 

Mag always expects us to spill over into her 
house upon occasion, and Polly would tell us to 
be sure and make use of the room she has, not 
to mention scores of others who would feel the 
same, so don’t be afraid that we can’t make room 
for all.” 

'' You are the dearest things,” said Jo grate- 
fully. “ You always act as if I were your very 
own.” 

So you are, and if you think you are not you 
are going to be, for a woman is what her hus- 
band is, according to the law, and you will be 
a- Virginian and a neighbor from this time out.” 

It was all very exciting and the girls sat up 
until late talking it over. When Dr. Paul ar- 
rived the next day. Nan was the first to meet 
him. She held out both hands exclaiming, ** I 
am so glad, so very glad.” 

So Jo has told,” he said, shaking her hands 
heartily. 

“ Yes, and it is the loveliest thing that ever 
happened. If I had searched the world over, 
Dr. Paul, I couldn’t have picked out a more 
suitable wife for you.” 

‘‘ Thank you. Nan. I must confess to feeling 
quite that way myself.” 

And I do hope you can be married in Sep- 
tember, as Jo says you would like to be.” 

“ It is what I would very much like, but I 


Jo and Her Prizes 279 

don’t want the dear child to act against her own 
wishes in the matter.” 

“We are trying to persuade her to be married 
from our house while we all are there.” 

The doctor’s face took on a pleased look. 
“ It’s just like you all,” he said, “ and I hope 
it may be so planned. I can’t imagine a more ac- 
ceptable arrangement on my part.” 

“ Here comes your ladylove with Mary Lee,” 
said Nan. I don’t know anyone I’d rather 
see Jo marry, Dr. Paul. I know you will appre- 
ciate her, but if you ever should make her un- 
happy, I warn you that you will have the whole 
Corner family up in arms.” 

He laughed. “ It’s well you warned me be- 
fore I begin to build my Bluebeard chamber.” 
Then Mary Lee came up with her congratula- 
tions and the doctor bore off all three to the 
Inn for a lunch to celebrate the event. 

A long talk with Jo’s Aunt Kitty, and a long 
letter to her father resulted in advice to fall in 
with the Corners’ proposition. Mr. Keyes 
agreed that it would give his wife extra care 
and trouble if they decided upon even the 
simplest sort of wedding. For his part he pre- 
ferred that Jo should use her own judgment and 
preference in the matter. He would either send 
her the money which it would cost him to make 
the journey or he would come to the wedding; 


280 The Four Corners at College 

he could not do both. Jo promptly decided for 
his presence and declared that she would rather 
be married in a checked gingham than have him 
absent, a speech which endeared her the more to 
her lover and friends. 

Aunt Kitty, a little wistfully, offered to do 
what she could, and was quite willing that Jo 
should be married from her house, but when the 
Corners assailed her with arguments she gave in, 
and yielded up her rights, promising to be on 
hand in September when it was decided that the 
wedding should take place. 

And so when Jo left Bettersley it was not to- 
return as a Senior. “We shall miss you woe- 
fully,’' Nan said, “ but we can see how much 
better it will be for both you and Dr. Paul not 
to put off the great event. Besides, Jo, it will 
be the greatest advantage to Mary Lee to have 
your affairs to think of this summer, and will 
take away all that feeling of dread she had when 
she thought of spending the summer at home.” 

“ Then I’m more content than ever that we 
have decided not to delay matters, for oh, Nan, 
I owe everything to you two, and to my dying 
day I shall thank the Lord for sending you to 
the Wadsworth school. It frightens me when 
I think we might never have met. I should have 
missed knowing Dr. Paul. It scares me to con- 
sider what a slight thing can change one’s des- 


Jo and Her Prizes 281 

tiny. All day I have been thinking how won- 
derful it is that in one week I should have won 
two prizes, one being the very best man in the 
world.’’ 


t 

i 




i 


CHAPTER XVII 

DOWN HOME 


Mary Lee and Jo started off with the doctor 
before Nan and the twins were ready for their 
trip to Virginia. Nan had promised to wait for 
Daniella and also to spend a couple of days with 
her old chum, Charlotte Loring, who this year 
was graduated from Barnard. The twins had 
been invited to their friend Barbara’s and were 
so eager to go that it would have been heartless 
to refuse them. At the end of another week, 
however, the four Corners were once again housed 
under the old home roof. 

The presence of Miss Sarah Dent’s boys, who 
with her occupied the house during the greater 
part of the year, had been rather the worse for 
the appearance of the place in general, and so 
it was proposed to furbish it up a little, a task 
which Nan and her Aunt Helen undertook while 
Mary Lee helped Jo with her plans. 

“ We shall be away only for another year,” 
said Nan, as the several matters were being dis- 
cussed at the breakfast table, and we may as 
well begin to get things into shape. How does 
the old wing look, Aunt Sarah ? ” 


286 The Four Corners at College 

‘‘ It is just as your Aunt Helen left it/’ she 
replied. “ I have kept it closed, though I have 
gone in once in a while to see that it was 
aired.” 

Then it wouldn’t be much trouble to get it 
in order.” 

“ No, a very easy matter.” 

‘‘ Ran won’t be here next year,” remarked 
Mary Lee, but of course Ashby will, and I 
suppose his friend Matt Moore will be, too.” 

‘‘ Don’t you think those two will be enough 
for you to take in. Aunt Sarah ? ” spoke up Mrs. 
Corner. “ You will scarcely care to have a 
number of strange boys, and now that four of 
those you have had are through with college, 
you will hardly want to begin upon a new batch. 
We shall be coming home in another year and 
shall want you, as well as the house, to our- 
selves. I suppose you will hate to give up 
mothering boys, but maybe my girls will take 
their place. Is Ran going abroad, did you 
say?” 

“ Yes, for a few months, and then he will 
decide upon his future field of work.” 

Oh, and he won’t be here this summer, 
then,” said Jean regretfully. I hope he will 
be back in time for the wedding.” 

“If we are to get the house into shape,” said 
Nan, “ we shall have to go up to town. What 


Down Home 287 

do you all say to a shopping expedition to the 
city?” 

“ All of us? ” queried Jack. 

No, honey ; you twins must stay at home 
with mother. Aunt Helen, Mary Lee, Jo and I 
can go. We may have to stay away two or three 
days, for we shall not want to make a second 
trip in hot weather.” 

“ I think,” Miss Helen suggested, “ that we’d 
better wait till we have decided exactly what we 
shall want to buy, and thereby save ourselves no 
end of trouble.” 

Wise aunt,” returned Nan. ‘‘ Of course 
that will be the thing to do.” 

Mitty had been promoted to the office of 
cook. Having served under so capable a mis- 
tress as Miss Sarah Dent she had developed into 
a good servant. Her mother Achsah did the 
laundry work, another descendant of Unc’ 
Landy’s had been taken in as chambermaid, and 
the old man’s successor did the outside work 
about the place. 

I shall never cease to mourn dear old Unc’ 
Landy,” said Nan to Mary Lee as they looked 
out from the porch over the neat lawn and blos- 
soming flowers. In those old days how he 
did work to keep things going. Can’t you see 
that funny old fence, Mary Lee, patched out 
with anything that came along? ” 


288 The Four Corners at College 

Mary Lee drew a sigh. “ Those were dear 
days, Nan. There will never be any quite like 
them. We have much more of this world’s 
goods than we had then, but we shall never have 
that care-free feeling any more. We have 
mighty good times, I admit, but somehow they 
are different. What a little imp Mitty used to 
be, and what a nice woman she is now. I am 
very glad she stays on; she seems a link to the 
past.” 

‘‘ She was caught young,” explained Nan, 
and that was why she was easy to tame. Aunt 
Sarah is a real old-timer and knows just how to 
bring up youngsters such as Mitty was. Where 
are you going, Mary Lee?” 

‘‘ Only over to Cousin Mag’s.” Nan watched 
the pretty little figure cross the lawn and go on 
toward Col. Lewis’s. Mary Lee never failed to 
make this morning call, no matter what the 
weather. Nan went in and presently was heard 
at the piano. Jo was in the library with Miss 
Helen absorbed in discussing dry goods and 
making out a shopping list. Daniella and Jean 
were making a tour of the place reminiscently 
discoursing upon the changes which had taken 
place. Jack was at the gate watching for the 
postman. 

“ The train is in,” said Jack, turning to her 
mother who was pottering over the flower beds. 


Down Home 


289 

“ I see the 'bus coming up the street. I wonder 
where it is going," she remarked, idly watching 
the clattering vehicle. 

The ’bus came nearer and nearer and at last, 
with a flourish, it stopped at the Corners’ gate. 
A young man with valise in hand alighted. 
Jack looked at him amazedly, opened the gate 
and stood back for him to enter. 

He stopped for a moment outside, set down 
his valise and took off his hat, looked puzzled, 
made a step forward. 

Well, Carter Barnwell,’’ cried Jack, '' why 
don’t you come in? What’s the matter?’’ 

It is Jack,’’ he exclaimed. ‘‘ I couldn’t be 
quite sure at first. How you have grown ! You 
don’t favor yourself, as the darky s say. 
You’ve put up 5^our hair, too. I knew it wasn’t 
Nan, but I couldn’t think a great tall girl with no 
flying locks could be Jack.’’ 

“ It is Jack, though. I’m sixteen, and of 
course my hair isn’t hanging. Here is mother. 
Come in.’’ 

Mrs. Corner came forward. “ Well, Carter 
Barnwell,’’ she exclaimed this is a pleasant sur- 
prise. Where did you come from? ’’ 

“ From Richmond. I am home for the sum- 
mer, and the doctor says I am as right as a trivet, 
so father is urging me not to go back. The 
Robertses have gone abroad, you know. I wanted 


290 The Four Corners at College 

to see you all the worst way, and you seemed 
so near, compared to the miles between here and 
California, that I thought I must start off and 
see how you all were. Jack wrote me that Miss 
Jo had taken the doctor. I’m glad of that. 
Any more exciting news ? ” 

“ Nothing quite so exciting as that,” Jack told 
him. ‘‘ Come in, come in and see them all. 
Mother, what room shall Cart have? ” 

‘‘ Oh, but I am not going to impose upon you 
when you already have a houseful,” protested 
Carter. “ I came here direct from the train be- 
cause I was aching to see you all, but I am going 
to stop at the hotel.” 

‘‘ That hole,” exclaimed Jack in disgust. 

Indeed you are not. Is he, mother? ” 

“ Not if we can make him realize how very 
glad we shall be to keep him with us.” 

“ There’s loads of room, truly. Cart,” Jack 
told him. 

“ And you will be the only man in the house, 
which I know is a position you adore,” added 
Mrs. Corner. So finally Carter succumbed and 
all went up to the house together where the 
young man received hearty welcome from Miss 
Helen and Nan. Jack went to hunt up Jean 
to tell her of the unexpected arrival, while Carter 
delivered the messages his mother had sent to 
her old friend, Helen Corner. 


Down Home 


291 


After a while Jack returned, having gathered 
in all the others. “ He didn’t know me,” she 
said, looking at Carter with eyes full of mis- 
chief. 

“ I didn’t expect to find a young lady,” Carter 
told her. ‘‘ I didn’t know girls could grow so 
much in three years. Why, you have shot up 
away ahead of Mary Lee, and have left Jean 
far behind. You are as tall as Nan, aren’t 
you? ” 

“ She’s just about my height,” Nan informed 
him, ‘‘ but if she overtops me she will have to be 
sawed off. Did you know we were going to 
have a wedding in the family. Carter ? ” 

‘‘No. Whose is it? Yours?” 

Nan laughed. “ Not yet, if you please. I 
am going to try it on the dog. In other words 
we are going to see how Jo fares. If she is 
very happy it may encourage the rest of us; 
if she isn’t we shall all go into a convent. You 
know Jo is to be married from here in Septem- 
ber.” 

“ You didn’t tell me that.” Carter turned to 
Jack. 

“ I haven’t had time.” 

“ You might have written, but then you don’t 
write very often, do you?” 

“ Oh, goodness, I write very often ; I think 
there is such a thing as a person who writes 


292 The Four Corners at College 

too often,” she added with eyes brimful of mis- 
chief. 

“ She is still an imp, isn’t she ? ” said Carter 
addressing Nan. 

An imp did Jack prove during the rest of Car- 
ter’s stay. She teased him, made fun of him, 
abused him, flattered him. One moment she was 
a romping child, the next a dignified young 
woman who kept him at a distance, and at the 
end of his three-days’ visit he went home be- 
wildered. 

Carter and Jack had been comrades from the 
time he came upon her when she was avenging 
a trick played by a boy upon the family servant. 
In those first childish days Jack had been wont 
to assert frequently that she meant to marry 
Carter when she grew up, but at the present time 
no one knew what Jack might or might not do 
in the course of her career. Carter did not neg- 
lect the rest of the girls, and though he was not 
aware of giving offense, he suffered ignominy at 
Jack’s hands more than once because she felt 
herself set aside for the time being. She would 
not have had anyone discover that she did feel so, 
and her methods of punishment were always 
too ingenious for even Carter to trace their mo- 
tive, but she herself knew. Carter was her 
peculiar possession, whatever way she might see 
fit to dispose of him in the future, and woe be 


Down Home 


293 

to him or to anyone else who made it appear that 
he was not. 

The shopping expedition took place as soon as 
it could be arranged, for all realized that there 
was much to do and the time was short. The 
wedding was to be a quiet, morning affair, quite 
simple, as Dr. Paul was in mourning and all felt 
that, in Jo's circumstances, display would be out 
of place. A wedding breakfast for the im- 
mediate family and friends would follow the 
ceremony, and there would be a short wedding 
trip to the chain of Virginia springs not so very 
far away. 

At Jo's request, no alterations were to be made 
in the arrangements at the doctor's home. Let 
it be kept as it was till some later day when they 
might like to make changes. It was comfortable 
and home-like, bearing the impress of its late 
mistress so beloved and mourned; and Jo, with a 
delicacy for which not everyone would have 
given her credit, felt that to both the older and 
the younger doctor it would give pain to see the 
old familiar things put out of sight. 

She had frequent interviews with Mitty into 
whose domain she penetrated, and whose face 
immediately assumed a broad grin when Miss 
Jo appeared. “ She sutt'nly are de livlies' 
young lady uvver I see," Mitty confided to 
Nan. 'Sensin' Miss Jack she mek me laugh 


294 The Four Corners at College, 

mo’n anybody. Miss Jack, she niek me laugh so 
I doan know whuther I cornin’ or gwine. Miss 
Jack ain’ growed up yet fo’ all she has dem long 
laigs, but I tells you, Miss Nan, she gwine be 
fus o’ yoh alls to git ma’ed. Miss Nan, huccome 
yuh lets dere be a weddin’ in dis house befo’ 
yo’n comes off ? ” 

“ Why, Mitty, you see my beau isn’t so lonely 
as Miss Jo’s,” .said Nan quite gravely, “ and 
he doesn’t need me as much as Dr. Paul needs 
her.” 

‘‘ Dat’s so,” replied Mitty. Then after giv- 
ing the subject some consideration, and hesita- 
ting to voice her curiosity, ‘‘ Miss Nan, who yo 
beau?” 

To tell you the truth, Mitty,” Nan said, ‘‘ I 
haven’t quite made up my mind.” 

This answer had the double advantage of giv- 
ing a little feeling of pride in the possible number 
of Miss Nan’s swains, and of stopping questions. 
Mitty had been in the family for so many years 
that she felt she possessed the privileges of an 
old servant such as her grandfather, Unc’ Tandy, 
had been. She lorded it over her young cousin. 
Aniline, and impressed upon her the importance 
of the family quite as notably as Unc’ Tandy had 
done. 

“ Gran’pap ain’ bang mah haid agen de wall 
fo’ nothin’,” she told Aniline one day. “ When 


Down Home 295 

I sassy he let me know de why an’ wha’fo\ 
an’ I bleedged to behave mahse’f to de young 
ladies, an’ yuh bleedged do de same es’n I mek 
yo haid buzz de same way.” Aniline, being an 
orphan, had no appeal and, as Mitty proudly 
boasted, was being brung up in de way she 
should go.” 

The prospect of a wedding caused excitement 
to spread in every direction. Old Dr. Woods 
was universally known and beloved, and his son 
was not far from receiving the same devotion 
from his townspeople. Everyone felt a personal 
interest in the wedding, and it was safe to pre- 
dict that the church would be thronged. Cousin 
Mag Lewis came over often to offer advice and 
help. She would entertain any of the guests 
they would send her. Cousin Polly was not less 
hospitable than her mother. Her own wedding 
had not been so long ago but she could counsel 
and direct. Her elder brother Tom Lewis was 
to be Dr. Paul’s best man. The two had been 
close friends from babyhood. 

The wedding breakfast, wedding gifts, and 
wedding garments were discussed until Mitty 
said, I ’clar I finds mahse’f tryin’ to beat up 
cake in de middle of de night. I jounced aroun’ 
so and banged mah ahms so it wake me up.” 

The girls’ own affairs for the coming year at 
school and college were set aside for this more 


296 The Four Corners at College 

important event. ‘‘We can go into Boston and 
get more clothes if we need them/' Mary Lee 
told her mother. “Jo must have hers and Miss 
Hackett can't sew for us all." 

“ That was a nice box Mrs. Leavitt sent 
down," said Nan, “ the only kindly thing any 
of her family have done for her, — poor old Jo. 
I don't wonder she loves her Aunt Kit." 

“Poor old Jo?" exclaimed Mary Lee. 
“ She's the happiest thing I ever saw, and would 
be if she had only the half of what she possesses 
in the way of clothes." 

“ You met Mrs. Leavitt, didn’t you, Mother? " 
Nan went on. “ She was there at the Wads- 
worth school that time you surprised us so." 

“ Yes, and I found her a very sweet woman. 
I am glad she is coming." 

“ Have we arranged about housing every- 
one?" asked Mary Lee. 

“ I think so," Nan answered. “ You and I 
are to go to cousin Mag’s, the twins to Polly’s. 
Mr. Keyes will come here, so will Mrs. Leavitt, 
Mr. St. Nick, Miss Dolores and Mr. Kirk. Mr. 
Leavitt is coming if he can get away. Ashby 
is going to the Pages’ and if that other cousin 
of Jo’s comes we can put him up in the wing 
with Carter. Of course Jo and Daniella will 
stay here. That will be — let me see — eight or 
nine in all. We can easily accommodate ten peo- 



They Made Much of the Little Bride 



t 







^ '* V^ CTEy^jf * 4 ^ ^1 f ■■ « *. . 

■ V'-# ' 

^ .V, vXRfi?I3v3Sr ^ ^ x»^ ^ 






* '-/■ 

__ ^0 ir M. m^m ’’^mz 


‘■5«P ; ’ ■ ■ ■ ‘ *> >- ‘ ^ ■' ■■ 





Down Home 


297 

ple.’^ And ten they did stow away when the 
time came. 

The wedding day was softly bright, a wind- 
less September morning. Jo’s father had ar- 
rived the night before, a thin anxious-looking 
little man, somewhat bald, and wearing eye- 
glasses. He was nervously concerned lest all 
should not go right, and was amazed to see how 
readily the family shouldered the affair which 
seemed to him such an undertaking. “ Young 
Tom,” as he was called to distinguish him from 
his father the Colonel,” was here, there, and 
everywhere. Aniline was so excited and so curi- 
ous lest anything escape her, that Mitty threat- 
ened to tie her in the kitchen. The girls swarm- 
ing around Jo, dressed her in her simple bridal 
dress of white crepe de chine, her aunt Kitty’s 
gift. Mary Lee was to be maid of honor. Nan 
and Daniella bridesmaids. They all wore white 
muslin frocks free from much adornment. The 
flowers they carried were from their own garden, 
though Jo bore a more pretentious bunch of 
white roses. 

The evening before, Jo had crept into Mrs. 
Corner^s room, her lips trembling as she said, 
I want my mother.” 

Mrs. Corner kissed and comforted her telling 
her that few girls entered a new home with hap- 
pier prospects, and that she must not feel her- 


298 The Four Corners at College 

self among strangers, for even when the Corners 
were not in town, there would be Mrs. Lewis 
and Polly who would stand by her and be ready 
to help her out of any emergency. Then she 
spoke of Dr. Paul’s mother, who had been Mrs. 
Corner’s dearest friend, of Dr. Paul’s babyhood 
and of the after years when he was growing 
up, so at last Jo declared she was the most for- 
tunate girl ever born and when anyone had so 
many dear angel friends on earth she must not 
grieve for her angel mother whom she scarcely 
remembered. 

Mr. St. Nick, jolly and fussy as always, was in 
high feather. He had sent Jo one of her hand- 
somest gifts. Mrs. Kirk, beautiful as ever, made 
much of the little bride, and poor Mr. Keyes, 
who fluttered about in the background, remarked 
to Mrs. Leavitt that he had no idea that Jo had 
made such friends. Mrs. Leavitt answered that 
she had long known Jo was worth anyone’s 
friendship. This brother-in-law of hers was not 
altogether to Mrs. Leavitt’s liking. She resented 
his indifference to her sister’s child. Though, 
poor man,” she said to Mrs. Corner, with such 
a houseful and not large means, an incapable 
and selfish wife, one shouldn’t expect too much.” 

At last all was ready and the little bridal party 
started for the church from which in a short 
time Josephine Woods walked forth with her 


Down Home 


299 


husband. Old Dr. Woods was the first to take 
her in his arms and call her daughter/' quite 
overshadowing little Mr. Keyes who stood wiping 
his eyes. Then came the wedding breakfast, 
which all united in making a merry affair. 
Later the bride and groom left in a carriage 
much bedecked with white ribbons and bearing 
on its top an old shoe which Jack had flung 
after it. 

The next day saw most of the guests de- 
parted. Mr. Keyes left on the night train, Mrs. 
Leavitt the next morning. Ashby remained, so 
did Mr. Pinckney, the Kirks and Carter, so there 
were quite enough to give gayety to the old 
brown house until, at the end of a week, Jo and 
the doctor returned. Then one after another 
these later guests departed and the Corners were 
left to pack their trunks and to make ready for 
a flight northward. 

They stopped to say good-by to Jo on their 
way to the train. It seemed queer to leave her 
there standing on the porch of the house so long 
known to them as Dr. Woods’. “ I don’t know 
that we shall ever get used to saying ‘ Jo’s 
house,’ ” said Jack. 

And oh, Jo, how are we to get along without 
you ? ” said Mary Lee. 

‘‘ If I had realized what it would mean to leave 
you behind, I am afraid I could never have en- 


300 The Four Corners at College 

couraged' you not to come back to college,” 
sighed Nan. “ Good-by, dear old Jo.” 

'' Good-by, Mrs. Woods. Do please write as 
often as you can.” This from Mary Lee. 

Good-by ! Good-by ! ” shouted the twins. 
Don’t forget us, Jo.” So off they went with 
many a backward look, at last turning the corner 
and leaving Jo to face her new experiences. 















CHAPTER XVIII 


IN A SNOWSTORM 

Well, here we are, Seniors,” said Nan, 
looking around at the familiar quarters at Bet- 
tersley. I can’t believe Jo isn’t just across the 
hall, and that we shall see no more of Milly 
Perry and Louie Truesdale and all those who 
were Sophs when we came.” 

It doesn’t seem like college without Jo, that’s 
a fact,” returned Mary Lee, shaking her head 
sadly. She sorely missed her old friend. 
“ There isn’t another girl I’ll feel like chumming 
up with in the same way. We’ve summered and 
wintered together for so many years now.” 

It won’t be so very long before we shall see 
home again,” returned Nan comfortingly. 

I am so very glad we decided to spend the 
summer at home,” Mary Lee continued. I 
shall long to get back there now instead of dread- 
ing it. What are you going to do next. Nan? ” 
'' I’m going down to the lake to have a pull. 
Come along. This year I mean to make good 
and get on the team if possible.” 

“ It seems to me you are laying out a great 


304 The Four Corners at College 

deal for yourself ; president of the Euterpe, on 
the staff of The Scroll, and doing all your regular 
class work besides.” 

“ Oh, ril manage,” returned Nan cheerfully. 

The training with the crew shall be my exercise. 
The Scroll my pastime, and the Euterpe my 
pleasure. I must have them all to offset hard 
study.” 

It strikes me that there is a deal of hard 
work in what you are pleased to call exercise and 
pastime,” said Mary Lee. ‘‘ I seem to remember 
haggard countenances last year consequent upon 
labors in those very directions.” 

“ Oh, well, if I find it is too much for me I 
can drop out of some of it,” said Nan. “ Come, 
let’s go down and get out Flosshilde. I wonder 
if she needs painting.” 

She ought not, for you painted her last 
spring.” 

They continued their way through the familiar 
halls of the building, meeting more than one old 
comrade and exchanging greetings. “ When 
did you get back? What’s the news? Why, 
hello, girls,” being the common salutations. 

The lake lay calm and lovely in the afternoon 
light, its silvery surface touched here and there 
by ripples, for more than one boat was out. The 
girls hunted up their own little craft and soon 
had it afloat, then both bent to the oars. Class 




CHAPTER XX 


BEGINNING AND END 

'‘The beginning of the end,” said Mary Lee, 
waking up one morning to see Nan already 
dressed and busy with pencil and paper. " This 
is really Commencement week and after this — 
what?” 

" The twins, of course,” Nan looked up from 
her writing pad ; " they must continue the family 
traditions here at college.” 

“ What are you doing there ? ” 

“ Making my will.” 

“ Oh, Nan.” 

" Yes, I am bequeathing my various belong- 
ings to Jack, Jean, and some others. Jack is to 
have Flosshilde and my cap and gown, Jean my 
Morris chair and revolving book shelves. I have 
some duplicate scores which I have handed over 
to the Euterpe Society and so on.” 

" I must follow your example,” declared Mary 
Lee. " It’s rather fortunate that the twins 
didn’t both overtop me, because my belongings 
of a certain character can go to Jean while yours 
will be better adapted to Jack’s use. They are 


340 The Four Corners at College 

little copy-cats anyhow, and Jean goes in for the 
things I do while Jack imitates you. By the way, 
did you hear Jean say that Carter would be here 
this week? She says he wrote that he wanted 
to see how the twins looked when they were 
changing into Freshmen, that he had always de- 
lighted in watching polliwogs turn into frogs. 
He is a ridiculous boy.” 

“ I am glad he is coming; the more the mer- 
rier,” averred Nan. There will be ever so 
many of the alumnae here and it will be a jolly, 
busy time. Mother and Aunt Helen ^wouldn't 
miss it for the world, neither would Mr. St. 
Nick. Ran is coming and so are Rita and Rob.” 
Three R’s,” remarked Mary Lee. 

“ Randolph and Robin are two pretty men ; 

They’ll have to leave when the clock strikes ten,” 

she sang. What are you going to do with the 
two of them. Nan? ” 

“ Oh, bless me, I don’t know. I’ll hand one 
over to you. Which will you take?” 

“ Neither. I prefer Miss Dolores to either 
one.” 

“Mean thing! Never mind, I can manage. 
There is no danger of either lad going a-begging. 
I am really quite curious to see what Europe has 
done for Ran. Aren’t you ? ” 

“ Well, yes, I suppose so. Have you heard 


341 


Beginning and End 

that Mr. Scott has come up to see Danny gradu- 
ated and that he is going to take her home with 
him? ” 

“Yes, I heard, or at least I knew he was com- 
ing. I wonder how Danny feels about going.” 

“ Half sorry, half glad, she told me.” 

“We must try to get over to the Wadsworth 
school for their closing exercises, though I don’t 
see how in the world we are to get it in, when 
there is so much going on here that we cannot 
possibly ignore.” 

“ I think maybe we can work it in,” said Mary 
Lee. “ Danny made me promise to visit her on 
her father’s ranch, and I’d rather enjoy the ex- 
perience. She wants us all to come, but says 
she would rather have one at a time so as not to 
use us up in one visit.” 

“ We’ll have to go surely some day. There, I 
have about made out my list. I have made Wini- 
fred Norman executor; she will enter into the 
spirit of it, and being in the Freshman’s sister 
class it will be nice for the kiddies to start in with 
her friendly interest. Jack will enjoy the read- 
ing of the will immensely.” 

“ I’ll name Peggy Phipps for my executor,” 
Mary Lee decided. “ She will like to mother 
Jean. You are right in arranging for this per- 
sonal interest ; it will keep the kiddies from feel- 
ing forlorn.” 


342 The Four Corners at College 

That same afternoon the twins appeared, 
Carter with them. Their sisters solemnly in- 
formed them that they had made their wills, and 
mentioned the executors. 

‘‘ When we have departed this life, as we are 
sure to do before long,’’ Nan uttered the words 
with great gravity, ‘‘ you will see that we have 
not forgotten you.” 

‘‘Oh, Nan, what do you mean?” asked Jean 
in alarm. 

“We are surely going to depart this life at the 
end of a week,” Nan told her. 

Jack laughed. “ I catch on. Don’t you, 
Jean? She means their college life.” 

“ Oh,” said Jean. 

Nan tousled her hair. “ Stupid little Fresh,” 
she said. “ You’ll have to do better than that 
if you want to keep up with your class and the 
Sophs.” 

“ Jack will see to it that Jean is not over- 
awed,” remarked Carter. “ Trust her for a 
champion.” 

“ We’re not afraid for Jack,” replied Nan, 
“ though I am rather sorry we can’t be here to 
see these two through their first year. How- 
ever, we have done our best to prepare the way 
for them.” 

The twins, who were now seventeen, were 
quite convinced that they were very much grown 


343 


Beginning and End 

up and that they should receive all the considera- 
tion and attention which they believed to be their 
due. Jack, full of life and spirit, was always 
the center of a group. Jean was more liable to 
select one person alone, as she declared she shone 
more in tete-a-tete, and when Jack was not there. 
Jack was a born leader, Jean a follower. 

This Commencement week Jack was in her ele- 
ment and was so much in demand that Carter 
was frequently left to seek his own companions 
or to wander aimlessly about wondering to whom 
he should look for entertainment. By this time 
Jack had completely enmeshed him, and if he had 
been fond of her as a child, as this tall young 
maid she entirely fascinated him and he realized 
that the early affection had all at once expanded 
into a most decided and tormenting infatuation. 
Just what Jack felt he could not determine, for 
one minute she was all tenderness, the next a 
provoking, teasing witch. 

She was particularly so one evening when the 
two were alone, and Carter, goaded to the point 
of indiscretion, suddenly leaned over and kissed 
the laughing lips that had just uttered words too 
perilous for his peace of mind. 

Jack started up in a perfect fury. How 
dare you?” she cried. “How dare you? I’ll 
never forgive you, never.” 

“ Oh, Jack,” said Carter beseechingly, as he 


344 The Four Corners at College 

caught her hand. “ I couldn’t help it, and it 
isn’t the first time Tve kissed you. Have you 
forgotten California, and the time you were so 
glad to see me in Europe? You used to let me, 
Jack." 

‘‘ I was a mere child then," returned Jack with 
dignity. That is all over and done with years 
ago, and I should think you would realize it." 
She spoke as if nothing less than a century had 
passed since then. 

“ But Jack, I love you. I have always loved 
you from that very first time. My love has been 
growing year by year and I think it would kill 
me to lose you." 

A soft expression suddenly arose to Jack’s 
eyes, a look Carter did not see, for he was bend- 
ing over the hand he still held. ‘‘ Jack, darling- 
jack," he pleaded, “ won’t you promise to marry 
me some day? You always used to say you 
would, and if I have to go back to California and 
leave you here I can’t answer for what might 
happen." 

This was too much for warm-hearted Jack, 
but Carter must be punished. “ I thought you 
were quite well," she said. 

1 am — now," returned Carter, but if you 
turn me down I’ll feel like going to the most 
unhealthy spot on earth, for I shall not care what 
becomes of me." 


345 


Beginning and End 

This was really a dreadful threat, Jack con- 
sidered, but she stood still without answering. 

“Please, Jack, — dearest, darling Jack,” 
begged Carter both of whose hands now held 
hers. 

“ Very well,” said Jack, “ I promise on one 
condition. If you so much as mention the sub- 
ject to me again or to anyone, for four years, 
the time I shall be at college. I’ll not marry you. 
Remember, that is the condition.” 

“ Oh, Jack ! ” Carter started from his seat, 
but Jack drew away and stood off looking at 
him warningly. “ Remember,” she said, “ not 
one word.” And all Carter could do was to ac- 
cept the situation, a hard enough one as he was 
made to realize during the days that followed. 
No matter what Jack might do or say he dared 
not expostulate, question or demand an explana- 
tion. She had tied his tongue. 

A busy, happy, merry week it was, for all the 
four Corners and their friends. There was the 
Seniors’ play given with an out-door setting; 
there was the garden party, and the Senior 
dinner. Concerts, receptions, and all other 
less important entertainments were crowded 
into Commencement week. Two automobiles 
whirled the Corners and most of their old 
friends over to see Daniella graduated from the 
Wadsworth school, but there was no time to 


346 The Four Corners at College 

tarry long there, for back they must hasten to an 
affair at the college. The Inn was crowded with 
guests. Every available room in the place was 
filled and there was a constantly varying scene 
in which bright young faces were the pleasantest 
feature. 

Nan handed over her Virginia cousin to Rita, 
herself going off with Rob. She was obliged to 
confess that Ran’s travels had improved him and 
that she had no reason to be ashamed of the 
young man who compared favorably with the 
city-bred youths she knew. 

If you will take my cousin off my hands I 
will take yours,” she told Rita. “ Fair exchange 
is no robbery.” 

“ I wish you would take mine for good,” re- 
turned Rita. 

‘‘ Sufficient unto the day is the evil thereof,” 
returned Nan laughing. This was no time to 
be thinking of possible lovers. Life was too 
full of other interests. There was too much to 
plan, too much just ahead which must receive 
consideration. Rita’s coming had increased 
Nan’s enthusiasm for her music and this was 
further augmented by the arrival of her old 
teacher, Mr. Harmer. So that one day after an 
unusually exciting and delightful talk with this 
gentleman who had just walked off with his old 
friend. Miss Helen Corner, Nan turned to Rita 


Beginning and End 347 

and said : “ Let’s go to Munich and study 

music.” 

What would I do with mother ? ” asked 
Rita. 

Take her with you of course.” 

And then what would her mother do ? 
Can’t manage it, Nan, but maybe we can go some 
day. What are your plans for next year ? ” 

** Oh, I don’t know. I used to think I’d be 
perfectly satisfied to stay at home, with mother 
and Aunt Helen and all, and to spend the re- 
mainder of my days in our little town; but when 
I think of no concerts, no opera, no anything 
very much, I am not so sure. Four years at 
college alters one’s outlook, and one feels im- 
pelled to leave the narrow paths for the broader 
roads. There are moments when I want to fly, 
fly over the wide world, see everything, know 
everything, broaden my horizon to the utmost 
rim. Aunt Helen has done that, but I notice she 
is getting tired of it.” 

“ I think one either does that or else is never 
satisfied to stay long in any one place. I think 
it would be a misfortune to possess the zvander- 
litst to that extent.” Rita spoke thoughtfully. 

Yes, Aunt Helen declares it fosters a rest- 
less spirit to travel too much, and that an oc- 
casional journey is worth more than the con- 
stant moving about, so I shall just wait and let 


348 The Four Corners at College 

my future work out as it will. I have had 
dreams of being a great musician, a wonderful 
pianist, but that dream is less alluring than it 
used to be. I think I should like to live in a 
musical community where I could belong to some 
little company of music lovers, who would join 
in playing concerted music. A place where there 
would be good concerts and all that, but I don’t 
know just what I want. I’m thinking.” 

“ And Mary Lee? ” 

Nan sighed. “ Her dream is shattered. She 
knew well enough what path she wanted to take. 
She is making a brave fight and is looking for- 
ward to keeping house for us all, to running- 
over to Jo’s and to exchanging recipes and crochet 
stitches with her. Mary Lee was born with do- 
mestic tastes, and she will not have to go far 
afield to satisfy them. It was never Mary Lee’s 
way to follow lofty flights, and then tumble to 
earth.” 

“ And what do you all intend to do this com- 
ing season ? ” 

W e are going to roost at home for a while. 
We’ll sit still and consider. A gathering of the 
clans will allow of many discussions and we 
shall probably force some issue that will de- 
termine us.” 

“ I wish it would be such as to bring you 
again to our island.” 


349 


Beginning and End 

We did have a good time there,” said Nan 
reminiscently, “ but I don’t know. I shall have 
to get used to my wings before I decide how far 
I shall be able to fly. Come over to the Biblos, 
Rita, and have some tea. It is always rather a 
jolly place, you know. Look at that Jack with 
a boy each side of her. Isn’t she the most 
tantalizing little minx ? I suppose she has 
dropped Carter somewhere and he is moping 
alone. She does that systematically. Poor old 
Cart, I never expected to see him take Jack’s 
vagaries quite so seriously. Perhaps we’d bet- 
ter go and hunt him up and take him out on the 
lake before we turn in at Biblos.” 

They took one of the side paths and presently 
came upon Carter, Mary Lee, and Jean, who 
were planning an automobile trip for the next 
day, so, finding Carter in good hands, the two 
followed out their original intention of going 
to Biblos House where many of the old girls had 
congregated and where tea was being served. 

Here, Nan Corner, you’re not doing your 
duty,” cried Emily Taylor as Nan entered. 

It’s time you were behind this urn. I believe 
I must have poured a hundred cups of tea in 
this past hour, and it is your turn. Nannie’s 
turn behind the urn is a promising beginning 
for a contribution to The Scroll, only — only we 
contribute no more to The ScrollT 


350 The Four Corners at College 

“ No more, no more will verses droll 
Drop from our pens to grace The Scroll,^* 

replied Nan, and here’s another stanza,” she 
added, taking Emily’s place; 

“ No more you’ll watch while Nannie doles 
Out cups of tea to thirsty souls.” 

‘‘ I can cap that,” returned Emily, taking up a 
plate of cakes. 

“No more will cakes and sweeties fine 
Be passed around by hand of mine.” 

And she walked oflf to supply some new ar- 
rivals. 

“ These ^ no mores ’ are terrible, however much 
we may joke about them,” remarked Nan. I 
suppose you felt the same way, Rita.” 

Yes, though it is something like the comment 
upon marriage : ‘ When you’re in you want to 
get out; when you get out you wish you were in.’ 
We forget all the grind when we cut loose and 
remember only the happy times.” 

‘‘ I certainly shall have a lot of happy times to 
remember,” said Nan dreamily letting her gaze 
fall upon the reflections in the burnished copper 
urn before her, and quite* disregarding an ap- 
plicant for tea. 

“ Here, here, Nan, wake up,” said Madge 


Beginning and End 351 

Wright. “I want two cups of tea, two sugars 
in each, no cream. Yes, lemon, please.” And 
Nan returned to her task. 

One or two more days, one or two more nights, 
then good-by to college for the two elder Corners, 
though for Jack and Jean it was but good-mor- 
row. There would be Winifred Norman and 
Peggy Phipps to look after them, and even 
Natalie Gray might be counted on in an emer- 
gency; for, though she belonged to the order of 
antagonists by rights, and as a Sophomore might 
join the ranks of those who were arrayed against 
the incoming Freshmen, as an individual she had 
informed Mary Lee that she would stand by Jack 
and Jean to the death. 

‘‘ For your sake,” she said weepingly. “ Shall 
I never see you again? ” 

‘‘ Certainly you will,” Mary Lee encouraged 
her by saying. ‘‘We shall probably come up for 
Commencement week so long as the twins are 
here.” 

There was a tremendous exodus one bright 
June day. North, south, east, west, claimed the 
Bettersley girls. The four Corners, with one 
last look at lake and hill, at the group of college 
buildings crowning all, and at last at the pretty 
station, turned toward home. What lay before 
them who could tell? Yet in each heart lived 
the hope of again treading the familiar paths, of 


352 The Four Corners at College 

hearing the bells ring and the hurrying feet rush 
through the corridors. 

‘‘ Four years/' said Nan reminiscently, ‘‘ and 
what next ? ” 

‘‘ Four years," echoed Jack, “ and think of 
what is before us." 

Four years," whispered Carter. Jack gave 
him a steely glance, but he only smiled. 




i‘ ^ri 


if 


* . ♦• 






^ . 


1 


,rf. 


, 's ' • y 

\ df4 . . j • 


f*'# 


t \ 




» 










y. 


•V 


’ '^7- ' * '■^ 


*1 . 




4 






\ .VK 


* ;(\ : 

if^: 

S, ' 

P^'x ?' 

#v k; 






f ev 

1 * ? . 


( / » 


'J.' 


■ ;^ve 


.'•l: » 
f ’l ^"Pi 




‘ !*■ -M 

V' » ’ ^ * 

vlM'. . 


t • 




r» 




rcjf^T 4 


h 


f». I * 


. ■ rii 


'{Sf-V’'.!^''''^ 




I , 


1. 


a 


I '*11 


'(/ 




f 


n 


-a 


Vv 




*h 


,1^% 


.1 • I 


4 


'T t !^' 


- I 


% t • i*- 

■• .1 . ' A’ 






dJ, 




*... .V 


I ■ ‘ 


<Ly 




- “ 1 ? ! 


^,i 




#' /< 




A*»«. 






t t 


» 


.' * 


• I I 


n ' '•?^ A 'y 
v'^ 


% 


■;C 




m 


! 


iV 


• 'i' /'. 


.»t J ♦ . 


« s 


^■»l 


r' 




i '.' 


/.f 


V ‘■., p' 


^1'' . 




y. 


;‘A- 








r <f 


1 i, 


i-m 




I { 


■Vti 


4 I'. 


;f 


\ r 






I ^ 


^1. ’V 




\l 




'2 


V, i 


* I 


V 


if 


U 


f?*'.' ♦ v' 


% - 




V V. 




/?t 


' • /•( 










f< 


i 1 


**Au 


■o 






« .' 


r-’ 


'>‘i'^ 








iu i. 


m 


* »A 

'i r •*•■* T - I 
,. »^‘v^ V A 

•.t*- i 


- 




IS 


» Tl« 


V !>■ 


f M •» 






I», 




,T » 






,*- I >^ 


s 




.•^ V 


> • 


►,14’ 




Ift 




'jJ ‘ ■:!• 






l ''1 I 


1 V 


‘^/V 


A' 


,sts 


lA:i:K', 




liC 






< » 


W^.3r* 


fill 


l.< 


0 ♦ 




Hr 


s^M 






t * ’,f 


It 


*, », J 


V 


y > 




^ 4 




,,* ' ; i", •< '.If 


>-.v 


\ ■♦ 




h\ ,W 

..W t I A^'l 


rtU? 




'\ 


,«• 


A'Ji 






V 


'fj 




tl 


I** 


i: 




i4. 




•1 lv. 


'V^ 


iJLia 


.t!' 


* * 


I 


IJ 


• j » 


Plu'- 




i/jl 




1 ■« 


ifS», 


ruteiJ 




iP:. 








« 'p- ^ 




^ ■> 

A s^ ' A' 

c”**”* ■^o. " .o':* .“'' 



v.,^ \\V' A>’ 

<>.» v^r ^ ,^v 

A 

^ ^ ‘'O ij. 

V 

= S .0 °o . -/ 

'WJ ^ ^ 

^ g> it ^ C\^ ^ 

^ ^ 0 V 0 ^ A^ ^ % 

V' "> ^ " - 

l\' ■“ cA A 8? As '^V* 

^ 2-. 

..‘i •=%. ; WHW* \'^^' ■■^/' 

* oV' 

°' A •‘A'.' G*:''.s'' ■ 

>^_ _V ^ . '^.> 



_A ^ \ 0 Ox. 

•'c. ' ' ' ' * ' A’s ^ \ '• • -> ' 


</>- y o 








<- . . ' 0 ^ ^ -^ .'\ 
s ae^rr/:^ ^ a\ , 

# : ^-"s > : 

1 > : ^0 o^. 

y <■'’ O 

>. Ao s 0 ^ A' 

^ ^ 0 ^ <js ' * « 

- ■%/ A.'^' 




'■• '<'r^ •:»• 

® .i^'^ V 

aS 

A^’ aa- 

^ "A ' ' " " ' ' A ' ' " ^ ' c ^ 

.» _r>s^ y *,:» ('N ^ ^ A » 

■>%, A "" /A -y '^/ . nj^ 




00 




* •> ■'' 

V A* '^' '’ 

8 1 A “ x;^ , . 

/■ c^. V A 

f » T-r 



A V 






^ rtplX j^r ^ n 

i^WAs' //O O 



“VAW.- .^'^''A 






,:/ cO''.' 



..''*« ^<ji 

>• .cx2^ -i Kcj 



' 3 ^ 



0 


VJ 


K 


^ o 


- "O** 


,s V ^,/'^> ' . 0 ’^' 

°^yw' 

'"' " " ' ' V'' . ^ jr * .%' ' “ ' ' 0°'^! “ * ^ 

O 





-» ^ 

^^ ' x^v>o- ^ 

I A \# , , , , "%. 0 H 0 '* 

- ' y 'zra®^ - ^ 

s'’ ° ♦* '^' '*•' 

A'’ 



V ^ 




«a 

rl '\\\vy ly///’ Aj 

-K^ —X 

O 

"cP . 

•D -V C s ,0 ^ 0 ^ K " 

' 0^ .V./., 

>• 



. ^ o ^ 

mm^ h 

'' O o k 


s O,'^* ck ^ 



-o’* % 

^ f?. 

o -Sr jA^^'A 

f\\\ / / /) O 

c,^ ^ 


W 

* a' 



^ « V ■'■■ '. ■S ''»-4 ■=• ■ 1 '^ ', - 5 K 

**'' <'^’ ^ ‘ < . x:. ' " " ^ A.x' ow. 

^ jFn f/Cr^ aV <». ^^sS?\\\T\^ ^ 



r %, '. 



( LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



□□□ED5L1HSE % 




J 


